The
Past of the Present Future
by
Daimeryan
Rei
Word Count:
64.765
Genre:
Action,
Adventure, Shounen-ai/Yaoi
Pairings:
Yami no Yuugi x Yuugi, Atemu x Mana, implied Mahaado x Atemu, Otogi x
Shizuka, unrequited Anzu x Yami no Yuugi
Summary: Every
world, every universe, has to obey the Great Timeline – that
which holds all worlds together, directing them towards the right
course of time. What if some of the timelines were disturbed, impacting
events that could change lives and worlds?
Rating: PG -13
Warnings: Foul
language, a little bit of violence. Major character
death in alternate timelines!
Author's
notes: Gratuitous use of artistic license *waves artistic
license
around*. Use of Japanese names (Téa = Anzu, Duke = Otogi,
etc). Several timelines and alternate universes are (mentioned) in this
fic, the most important one is the canon universe as we know it, one
alternate universe, and one alternate timeline. Beta-ed by Ilene. Any
mistake still left is mine to make. Written for the first YGO Novella
challenge 2006. Feedback greatly appreciated.
Timeline
I, Khemet
“Bring
him to me!”
The guards
kept their faces emotionless as they shouted their confirmation of
“Yes, Great Pharaoh!” Saluting, they bowed and
moved backwards, only to turn around and leave the Throne Room when
they were out of sight of the great Sun and Star, ruler over Lower and
Upper Egypt, the Pharaoh himself. Showing your back to him was always a
bad idea - the Pharaoh was easily offended at the slightest sign of
disrespect, and one simply didn’t turn his back to the son of
the Gods. Atemu, son of Akunamukanon, had issued the order to bring a
thief to justice; in his position as Pharaoh he was
justice, and he knew how to use it. While the other guards kept a close
eye on everyone present in the grand room, Atemu leaned back in his
throne, flanked by his six Priests who served as his counselors.
Mana softly sighed, shifting her arms as if she was hugging herself. It always felt cold in this room, no matter how warmly she dressed, and with the average temperatures of the holy land of Khemet, there wouldn’t have been a need for a warm dress in the first place. Her eyes darted around towards her fellow Priests. They were all silent, awaiting their Pharaoh’s orders, trained to adequately and efficiently advise him, execute his wishes and demands, and guide him when dealing with state affairs. He hasn’t asked much for advice lately, she thought to herself. She knew about his workload and responsibilities, but it had been a while since he had listened attentively to the input of his counselors. Mana blew a wayward strand of thick, chestnut hair out of her face. Not for the first time, she felt completely superfluous and unwanted - she was just…standing there, as to complete the holy number of six: six Priests to form the Pharaoh’s Court.
Karim was standing next to her, holding up his Sennen Scales. The Item was used to measure the evil in one’s soul - she wondered what would happen if it were to measure Atemu’s soul. No, the Pharaoh, she corrected herself immediately. No one thought or spoke about him with his first name. He’d given her his permission to refer to him with his first name though, but Mana hardly used it nonetheless. She was used to thinking of him as Prince first, and Pharaoh later…and no matter what they had been through, the friends they used to be and still were, she couldn’t tear down that thin wall. It was too intimate, and it all but made her snort. They’d shared their bodies, she’d seen him naked, she had wrapped her legs around his waist and begged him to take her, and still she refused to call him by his first name because it felt too intimate to her.
Next to Karim was Akunadin, the eldest of the Priests, but certainly not the wisest. She didn’t like the man, not one bit. It wasn’t only for the Sennen Eye he was wearing, replacing his natural eye and distorting the left half of his face, but also for the lack of compassion, lack of empathy, lack of…everything she felt with him. He was reclusive unlike Karim, who adopted her immediately into their little ‘family’ of Priests, welcoming her even though she took the place of her teacher, not ready for full Priesthood herself. Akunadin had only smiled at her, a smile that had given her the creeps; maybe his Eye could see right through her to the core of her very soul, and that scared her.
She heard noises from the entrance of the Throne Room, but wasn’t allowed to look up; all six Priests stood opposite of each other, aligned in front of the Pharaoh so he could consult them at any time possible. She hated these meetings; it wasn’t as if Atemu listened to them and valued their advice anyway. It was meaningless to stand together like this, easily discarded and dismissed at any point the Pharaoh saw fit. I want to think of you as the boy you once were, my sweet little friend who plucked plums for me from the tree. Mana swallowed bitterly.
Shaadah was standing in front of her, firmly clutching his Sennen Ankh to his chest. He was able to measure the kaa in one’s soul, determining whether it was evil or not. He was a hardworking man, truly devoted and diligent, but she didn’t felt comfortable approaching him with her own worries and doubts. She knew he’d never mock her or belittle her in her face, but still… ‘neutral’ was the best description for any person like Shaadah.
“I didn’t do it! Let me go!”
“Silence!”
Mana closed her eyes, heaving a frustrated sigh. The thief, struggling in the grip of the guards, violently protested against being dragged across the floor. He grunted when he was hit on the head to keep him silent; she hated this show of excessive force, and she knew already what was coming. It hadn’t been any different lately. Her eyes sought out Aishizu, her fellow Priestess wearing the Sennen Tauk. The woman was the living illustration of the Goddess, claiming beauty, brains, intelligence and unruffled composure…there was almost nothing that could disturb Aishizu, and her words were held in high regard by everyone. Mana caught her attention, throwing her a pleading look. She only received a soft, acquiescing smile in return. Aishizu knew what was coming as well, but she remained standing lifeless, hands limp at her sides. The woman had only one negative trait, as far as Mana could think of: her calm acceptance of everything. No matter how heavy the storm, no matter how drastic a consequence, no matter how violent, bloody, or extreme a situation, Aishizu would always calmly accept everything. Her Item allowed her glimpses of the future; a possible future, anyway, and the glimpses were always confusing and difficult to interpret. Ironic for someone as linear as she was, but she’d accepted even that with her calm and silent demeanor.
The thief fell to the floor with a loud thud, grunting in pain as one guard planted his foot in his back to force him to bow.
“Avert your eyes, scumbag!”
Mana pursed her lips. She knew there was no use in looking at the last one of the Court, High Priest Set himself. He wouldn’t come to anyone’s rescue; the way he held a tight grip on his Sennen Rod was characteristic for the man himself. He had a tight grip on everything: his emotions, his speech, whatever situation, whatever circumstances. Nothing eluded him; nothing escaped his grasp or attention. She wasn’t sure if she was afraid of Set. No, not afraid…wary, maybe. With the exception of Akunadin, he was the last one she’d ever approach. Set was always busy of course, and his strive for perfection in everything he did was well-known. He was blunt and harsh in his judgment and actions, but one thing was undeniable: his loyalty to the Pharaoh was beyond questioning. Her lips quirked into a wry smile. There was only one whose loyalty went above all and everything, at least, so they had believed…she didn’t notice when her mouth drew into a bitter, scowling line. So they had believed.
“State your crime, thief!”
The man gurgled, blood trickling from the corner of his mouth. He’d stopped squirming, though his hands tried to free themselves from the rough rope tied around the wrists. With a quick glance, Mana could see the chafed skin and felt horrified when seeing the angry red abrasions. Her mind was already providing her with herbal remedies, her vast knowledge of the healing art renowned throughout the Royal Palace. She shivered, trying to focus on nothing in particular, just staring in front of her until this ordeal was over. The coldness in the room wasn’t due to any temperature - it came from the man in the middle, sitting on his high throne; the man whose word was law, whose will was strong and rigid, and whose eyes had changed from attentive and compassionate to heartless and cold, so very cold. Mana lowered her eyes, her arms still shifting as it was hard for her to stand still and remain motionless like the others. It had already been years since she took her Master’s place, but she’d never been able to acquire the ability to resemble a statue while the Court was in session.
“Speak up!”
The guard pressed harder with his foot on the man’s back, the thief groaning in pain.
“This is what you deserve, you lowlife monster!”
“Enough!”
The guard immediately jumped to the side, as the Pharaoh had spoken. He bowed and knelt on the floor. Mana couldn’t help but sigh in relief; no endless torture and screaming this time. She almost blinked in surprise as the next moment, Atemu rose from his throne. With a collective gasp, the six Priests took a step back to make way for him as he calmly descended from the small plateau, taking the five steps in a composed and slow pace.
The thief dared to look up, nervously licking his lips, a shudder wracking his body. The Pharaoh himself was walking towards him…he was going to come face to face with the exalted ruler of Khemet, the veritable son of the Gods. Something he’d never imagined happening when reaching for the gold and jewelry when he was…
“Robbing tombs,” Atemu spoke neutrally. His voice was low, but not deep; he spoke without volume because he knew people would make sure they would hear him. “What were you expecting to find there? Riches? Treasures?”
“Answer the Pharaoh!” the guard on his left side nudged him with his elbow, digging into his ribs. The thief grunted again, his lips twisting in a snarl.
“Gold,” he finally spoke, “I was looking for gold.”
“You were looking for gold,” Atemu repeated. “You trespassed in a holy sanctuary, breached sacred barriers and called for the anger of the Gods…for gold.”
The man licked his lips again, his greedy eye trailing over the jewelry the Pharaoh was wearing - earrings, bracelets, rings, his dia dia’ankh, his crown…and the most magnificent piece of all, dangling from a cord around his neck: the Sennen Puzzle. Not a second later, he was backhanded forcefully, a yelp escaping him.
“Tell me,” Atemu demanded, moving his arm back to cross it in front of his chest, just above the Puzzle. “Did you try to steal the gold to buy bread and water for your wife and children, or did you want to use it only to enrich yourself?”
The thief pressed his face down to the floor again, angry red cheeks hitting the cool tiles, mostly because of the guard forcing him to keep his head lowered.
“My wife and children!” he sobbed. “Great Pharaoh, they have nothing to eat! I had to…I had to breach the sanctuary, for my children would die...!”
“Great Pharaoh!” The other guard fumed. “This man has been caught in the act, with objects and holy relics on him, trespassing in the resting place of our ancestors!”
Atemu seemed to think for a moment, before he turned around and walked back to his throne, the six Priests silently waiting. Mana lowered her eyes again as he passed her – he always slowed down when he passed her, and she knew he would look at her, but she didn’t want to look back at him – and climbed the steps again.
“Rise,”
he simply said while he sat down. The guards hoisted the thief back on
his feet, the man trying to glare defiantly.
“For
your word that your wife and children are starving, you certainly do
not seem to have any trouble looking after yourself,” Atemu
continued. “Your clothes are in excellent condition, your
body does not show any sign of deprivation. I saw the look in your eyes
when you lifted up your head. There is nothing but greed in your soul.
Not even your kaa is worthy enough of extracting -
your bitter feelings are misplaced. Life is not a free ride. There are
chances, challenges and opportunities enough, and skills and knowledge
are rewarded. You, on the other hand, thought you could make an easy
fortune by following into another’s footsteps.”
The thief
growled, but didn’t object. Atemu barked a short laugh; this
time the disdain was more than obvious.
“The
King of Thieves is dead. Did you really think that
a simple, petty thief like yourself could claim his title? You will
have to do far better than that, and even then, death will await
you.”
“You
needed the Gods to kill him!” The thief suddenly spat.
“And you-”
“The
Gods I rightfully command,” Atemu interrupted him, though the
guards were already at the thief’s throat to silence him.
“Bakura’s kaa was strong, and
he was an admirable adversary in some ways. I will give him the honour
and credit of being the first and only one to date to rob the royal
tombs - but you, my friend, you did not make it through the antechamber
before you got caught. You managed to steal some holy relics and a
little bit of gold…”
Mana’s
heart sank. She barely realized she was digging her fingers into the
fabric of her dress, the hood of her cloak suddenly weighing heavy on
her. Atemu was about to sentence the man, and it wouldn’t be
a surprise what his judgment was going to be.
The thief
himself shivered, the guards keeping their firm grip on him. There was
no way out; even if he did manage to break free from the guards, there
were more at the exit of the room, and they were all wielding spears
and staffs. He would be dead before making it through the door.
“Did
you really want to follow in his footsteps?” Atemu asked, but
clearly didn’t expect the other to answer him.
“Very well then. You will follow him: into death. You will be
drowned in the Nile, and let it be a consolation to you that the holy
waters will take your miserable life...”
It
shouldn’t have come as a surprise, but Mana still was unable
to suppress the shudder when Atemu declared the death sentence. The
thief was just that - a silly, greedy, petty thief, but he could pay
for his crimes by working at the lands, in the mines, or at one of the
large construction sites. Any thief could work off his debt and learn
from his mistake, or so Mana thought. Besides, hard labour
wouldn’t kill anyone. She lowered her head, feeling sick to
her stomach.
The two guards
dragged the thief away, who erupted in loud curses and pitiful pleas,
screaming about his wife and children. His cries ended abruptly, just
barely outside the Throne Room; she suppressed another shudder. She had
only the faintest of hopes that the man would die quickly out of fear
instead of the anguish of fighting for the last gulp of
breath…her mind couldn’t even grasp the concept of
being drowned, and she was only thankful that she wasn’t
obliged to attend the execution. Her breathing came in shaky gasps; it
was impossible for her to stand still and to look in front of her as if
nothing had happened.
“Court
dismissed,” Atemu said, tone of voice rather bored. The
Priests seemed to loosen up a little and they all bowed one by one to
him before leaving their respective places, about to devote their time
to their usual chores and tasks. Mana heard the fabric of her dress
rustle when she bowed to him, her hands neatly folded and her head
lowered as she was taught to, and it was hard to believe that she once
counted the days until she was able to wear the robes of a Priestess.
They felt constricting and suffocating, instead of the prestige and
rightfulness she always associated them with. Every Priest of the
Pharaoh’s Court was wise, dedicated, devoted, strong and
rightful…but why did it felt so wrong to be here? Because
she was the only one without an Item – her teacher taking the
Sennen Ring with him as he fled - the only one still
learning, the only one able to take his place…but unable to
remove or cover up the stain he had left?
Mana hurried
to leave the Throne Room, glad that she could be away from the cold and
the gloomy environment. Things had changed over the course of the
years, and she knew who was responsible for it. She tried so hard to
keep everything, to keep the Pharaoh himself, in balance, but she was
slipping. She wasn’t strong enough for this; she missed her
teacher and his guidance, not to mention his wisdom and patience. Mahaado…teacher.
Why did you leave? We could’ve worked it out.
Didn’t you trust me?
Her hands clenched into fists, and the tears stinging in her eyes
weren’t from sadness or grief this time. It was pure,
unadulterated frustration and powerlessness - and she
would’ve given everything in her power to make things right.
Everything. Even her own life.
“Mana…Mana!”
She came to a
halt, her large dress flapping around her ankles, the fabric rustling
as the folds wrapped themselves around her body. The hood of her cloak
slipped from her head, revealing her hair, the thick locks framing her
face. She’d already recognized his voice.
“Yes,
High Priest?”
“You’ll
have to learn not to show your disgust so openly,” Set spoke
as he walked up to her. She hated the man’s impossible height
that made everyone automatically look up to him. His eyes were calm and
open, and his words were slightly reproachful, not scolding.
“He
might be a lowlife, a petty thief, but he’s a human
being,” Mana answered. “Working his debt to society
off in one of the mines would be punishment enough.”
“He
did enter the antechambers of the royal tombs, Mana. You know how our
Pharaoh feels about that…and how that weighs with his
judgment.”
“I
know…but he’s supposed to judge fairly and with
consideration, not by attaching his own emotions into the sentence. It
shouldn’t be like this. There has to be a fair trial for
everyone…”
“The
Phar…my cousin is a God,” Set dryly remarked. He
held the Sennen Rod clutched to his chest, the golden Item faintly
flickering whenever it caught a ray of light. “His judgment
will never be questioned.”
She showed him
a faint smile, not wanting to irritate him. Set was extremely strict
and straightforward; he simply said what he wanted to say, without
sugar-coating his words. He wasn’t one for
chit-chat or idle conversations; though it was indisputable how hard he
worked, it was also indisputable how honest and fair he was, be it very
blunt most of times. Only recently it had become known that Priest
Akunadin was Set’s father, and being the brother of the late
Pharaoh Akunamukanon, that made the High Priest and the Pharaoh
cousins. Set wasn’t the one to bemoan the fact that he
could’ve been the actual Pharaoh; he saw his duty and
obligations as his lifework and didn’t strive for any higher
position then he was in now. Still, sometimes there was a faint glimmer
in his eyes, harshness on his face and a little bitterness in his voice
to be heard - maybe an old remnant of jealousy or envy, or maybe a hint
of lament of not taking his chances after all…
Set snorted,
shifting his stance a little.
“You know him better than anyone,” he continued. “He will not allow much to get to him, but if he does…the one to cross him in his beliefs and convictions has a very, very big problem.”
Mana shook her
head, sending strands of her hair flying.
“This
is not the Pharaoh I know,” she said. “This is not
the person I grew up with.”
“He
is my cousin,” Set repeated. “He was raised even
stricter than me for his future duties and obligations as ruler and
Pharaoh. He could not remain the same person you always knew, Mana. The
burdens are heavy, the pressure is high. It is normal for people to
change.”
“It
is his Puzzle,” she whispered.
“Excuse
me?”
It
didn’t elude her that the High Priest intensified his grip on
the Sennen Rod.
“Those
Items of yours,” Mana said. “Mahaado knew there was
something wrong with them, something evil…”
“Do
you still believe that coward’s words?” Set asked
her derisively. It wasn’t exactly a secret that Set and
Mahaado hadn’t gotten along. The High Priest wasn’t
really friends with everyone, not even with his cousin, and he and
Mahaado had been all but despising each other from the moment they met.
To Set, only his own work and opinion mattered, as well as the state of
perfection he’d achieved in everything he did - something he
expected from his fellow Priests, and anyone unable to attain that
level was by default less worthy. Since his flight from the Royal
Palace, Mahaado had dropped to the lowest ranks of Set’s
opinion; not that he was up very high in the first place.
“My
teacher…” she started, but immediately fell
silent. He’s not a coward. He’s not!
“There
is a still so much you need to learn,” Set answered,
“and learning how to see your ‘teacher’
in a different light than the pedestal you placed him upon would be the
first thing.”
“He
had his reasons!” she hissed, unable to keep the strong
emotion surging through her in check. She hated it when people
criticized her former teacher, especially now that he wasn’t
around to defend himself. Her fingers clutched again at her dress. He
made a mistake by fleeing the Palace, and no one would let him live
that down should they find him again…but she doubted the
greatest spirit sorcerer of Khemet would ever be caught. It
wasn’t for nothing that the Pharaoh’s troops always
returned empty-handed from their search.
“Like
I said, still so much to learn,” Set looked down at her, tone
of voice almost bored, just like Atemu’s has been. In some
ways, the cousins resembled each other far more than they’d
care to admit. She shook her head again.
“He
had his reasons.”
“He
was afraid of dying.”
“Aren’t
we all?”
“No,”
Set immediately retorted. “Especially if it is for our
Pharaoh. No one could ever imagine that his loyalty was broken so soon
when death was in his neighborhood. He disappointed every one of us,
and our Pharaoh the most.”
“I
know,” Mana said, her voice low, apologetic. It was
a big mistake, and she was sure it had contributed to Atemu
becoming ruthless over the years. If Mahaado had been around, Atemu
more than likely wouldn’t have turned out to be like this,
the ruler people feared instead of respected, the emotionless Pharaoh
that barely smiled. She couldn’t remember the last time he
had held an open Court; both Akunamukanon and Atemu had been known for
their desire to stay in touch with their people, their own nation.
Holding an open Court would mean that everyone, no matter their social
status, was allowed to visit the Royal Palace and ask for advice from
the Priests and the Pharaoh himself. It all had changed, and she knew,
deep down inside, that her teacher and his…bad decision were
a great contributor to how Atemu was now. That, and that Puzzle.
“Those
Items,” she repeated, her eyes darting towards the Rod.
“They all have a certain power over you. A compelling,
corrupting power, and my teach…Mahaado knew that. It took
him half of his heka to seal the evil in his Ring
alone.”
“If
that is your way of explaining why he was so weak in his dueling with
his kaa, then it is certainly a lousy
one,” the High Priest said, unimpressed. “Mana,
take it from me: Mahaado was a coward. He might have had his reasons,
but he still left the Royal Palace, and his departure was disastrous
for my cousin, only for the sentimental reason that he missed his
friend. Your Master posed himself as a friend, but he did not think
twice to discharge himself from all his responsibilities and
obligations to leave his Pharaoh alone. I am glad though that my cousin
saw in time what sort of ‘friend’ Mahaado was, and
grew to be stronger from it.”
“No,
not stronger,” Mana objected. “Weaker.
There’s no strength in sentencing people to death, no
strength in cutting off all your emotions, no strength in losing
oneself in darkness.”
Set didn’t answer to that, but the expression on the High Priest’s face spoke volumes.
“I
will leave you to your duties now,” he finally said.
She bowed
quickly, nothing more than a slight nod of her head really - usually
the Priests didn’t bow to each other, but everyone made an
exception for Set. She waited until his footsteps had died away until
she all but ran through the hallway to her own room, throwing the door
closed behind her.
There was no
knock on her door before it was opened; the burly guard was
announcement enough for the one who was entering. Mana quickly rose
from her chair, silently thanking the Gods for giving her the insight
not to study Mahaado’s scriptures today; she doubted Atemu
would appreciate seeing the writings of her former teacher strewn out
all over her desk.
“My
Pharaoh,” she said and bowed for him.
“Mana,”
he returned, his voice warmer than before, and with a smile on her
lips, she looked up at him. His eyes didn’t reflect the
warmth in his voice and she quickly hid the disappointment she felt. It
was too much to ask for.
He lifted up his hand to stroke her cheek. His touch was gentle and she
found herself leaning into it, believing for one moment this all could
be honestly real. Someone who cared for her, someone who loved her and
had interest in her, and saw her differently than she really was: Mana,
not the Priestess, not the former apprentice, just…Mana.
“Why
did you leave my Court so hastily, Mana?”
She shivered
slightly when his hand slipped from her cheek to her bare shoulder. Her
linen shenti was tied together in front just above
her breasts, a golden jewel representing the holy scarab holding it
into place. She knew it was his favorite kind of dress, and her cheeks
colored darkly. Even now, after everything that had happened, she still
wanted to please him, wanted to have his approval, while she lowered
herself to nothing but a tool in his hands. She knew she
wasn’t the friend to him that she used to be. Not because of
her, but of how much he had changed…and still she longed for
his touch, longed to feel his fingers on her skin…
“My
Pharaoh…”
“In
our private quarters, you are allowed to use my name, Mana.”
She shivered
again. It wasn’t as much as a reminder as a command, and she
had difficulties addressing him with his first name - it created
distance to her.
“A-Atemu…”
“Yes?”
“That
poor man…”
“He
dared enter a holy sanctuary,” Atemu said, and he all but
shrugged. “We cannot allow anyone to trespass into our
ancestors’ tombs, Mana. Those who dare know of the risk they
take.”
“He
didn’t need to die,” Mana objected, and leaned a
little forward so their cheeks touched. He smiled softly, his other
hand taking hers and gently stroking her fingers.
“Habeeba,”
he said, lowering his voice. “Do you really think I would be
merciful to anyone who dares enter the royal tombs? My
father’s resting place has already been desecrated once. I
will not stand for a second time.”
“The
King of Thieves is dead,” Mana replied, standing still as his
hand trailed over her collarbone. “He no longer walks among
us. I understand, Pha…Atemu…how you feel.
Please...show mercy to those fools who think they can walk in his
footsteps. Show them the errors of their ways, instead of sentencing
them to death. You are the Pharaoh, the ruler of this nation - it is
your duty to be merciful…”
“I
will not stand for it,” Atemu interrupted her, repeating his
words. His other hand slid over her arm and shoulder, tracing her
smooth skin. “I will not allow these thieves to roam free and
think they can rob tombs unpunished.”
“Atemu…”
He
didn’t answer and tilted his head a little instead, brushing
his lips over her cheek.
“Mana…”
Hesitantly,
her arm came to rest over his shoulders, knowing that the curve of her
breasts would adjust itself accordingly, creating the desired cleavage.
Soon enough, she would feel his hands on them, stroking through the
fabric of her dress until he got impatient and would rip it from her,
exposing her to the light, exposing her vulnerability, and she hated
herself for it…but she couldn’t live without his
touch, live without him so close to her. She would live for the thought
that she could make things right, that she could bring back the old
Atemu she adored, the boy who believed in justice and fairness without
showing off power or intimidation.
“Ah,”
she gasped, as the Puzzle suddenly pressed painfully in her abdomen.
Without another word, he pulled away from her, hands tugging at the cord to take the heavy Item off. As usual, he put it on her desk, the piece of furniture easy to spot from every corner of her room. Mana bit her lip. She knew she had to feel proud and honored that he trusted her, that he felt at ease enough in her company to take off his ultimate symbol of power: the Sennen Puzzle. It wouldn’t take long before he would put it on again, though. This weight, this symbol that had been put on his shoulders far too early, was something he couldn’t live without. It made her feel sick to her stomach, how he couldn’t be separated from the Item, that he placed it so that he could keep an eye on it from wherever he was. He would still steal glances at it, even when his hands were all over her, his body pressing hers down on the bed. He would look at it when he touched her between her legs, making her squirm and arch her back to lean into his ministrations - he would look away from her. She felt like crying as he laid her down on the bed, large golden earrings resting upon her skin as he kissed her all over. Crying from happiness because she liked, no, loved the physical sensations, crying from the feelings of hatred because she abhorred the physical sensations at the same time, crying from the powerlessness she felt…but her body was already responding eagerly, so willing, and her mind went blank. As she surrendered completely to him, she only cried one more time for the loss of her teacher, the loss of her innocence, and the loss of her hope.
Timeline
II, Alternate Universe: Domino City, Japan
Jounouchi
Katsuya rolled over in his bed, pulling the pillow under his head
closer to him, snuggling into it. He shivered - it was cold in his
room. Damn winter,
he thought, smacking his lips. It was a school day, and his alarm clock
would go off any minute; until he heard the loud buzzing sound, he was
going to doze a little. The sound of breaking glass made him cringe and
he pressed his head deeper into the pillow, as if to shut the noise
out. I guess dad is up early this morning too. He
groaned.
The second his
alarm clock started buzzing, Jounouchi swatted at it, almost shoving it
off the small nightstand. He hated getting up so early, but school was
the only place where he could relatively be, or feel, at ease. There
was nothing his father or his environment could offer him here but
empty cupboards, no heating, a slap to the face or a beer bottle to his
head…
Yawning, he
threw the blankets off, shivering forcefully. Would there be warm water
today? Jounouchi got out of bed, traipsing through his small bedroom to
gather a towel and a bar of soap. It brought a small smile to his face
- Shizuka had bought him the soap, as she would often buy small things
for him. She didn’t mind that he’d put up a show of
not being willing to accept it, that she really didn’t need
to buy him things, but they both knew he needed it
- his father didn’t care about a thing, and his job as a
paperboy wasn’t very lucrative.
He opened the
door of his bedroom and peeked through the opening; his father
wasn’t in the hallway. Probably not in the bathroom either -
the man hadn’t taken a proper shower since forever, and he
didn’t want to come across him in just his pajamas. Hell, he
didn’t want to come across his father fully clothed. He was
an asshole, a drunken jerk. Jounouchi squelched the train of thought.
He wasn’t going to ruin his own day - it
was a Wednesday, which meant that he got to see Shizuka later this
afternoon!
He forced
himself to whistle all through the icy cold shower - darling father
probably hadn’t paid any bills, as the lights
weren’t working either; he would have to take a look into it
later - and brushed his teeth, squeezing out the very last bit of the
toothpaste. Damn. Jounouchi tried to fix his messy
blond hair, gave up on it and spend a few minutes getting dressed,
grabbing his schoolbooks and leaving before his father noticed that he
was up in the first place. He didn’t feel like a
confrontation, not today.
Jounouchi
slung his book bag over his shoulder. With a bit of luck,
he’d brought the right books for today; he always stuffed a
few without giving it a second thought into his bag. For his schedule,
he depended on his best friend Honda Hiroto - when he wasn’t
obsessing over Miho, the airhead of their class. Despite everything,
Jounouchi smiled again. He may not be every teacher’s pet,
but he didn’t loathe school. He liked the PE and the arts and
craft lessons, he always liked working with his hands. The boring
biology lectures, the monotonous history classes, not to mention
linguistics and math…he shivered. Coming across a certain
corner, Jounouchi slowed down, listening to the sounds. The Hirutani
gang was notorious for hanging around here, and even though he was a
member of the gang himself, he didn’t feel like a
confrontation with them either. He wasn’t exactly proud of
being a gang member, but found it difficult to leave - with most gangs,
it was easier getting in than getting out. He usually kept away from
the fights and the petty shoplifting, not wanting to build up a police
record. After all, he did want a job later in life,
unlike the other gang members. Jounouchi might be dumb sometimes, but
he wasn’t stupid. He knew the importance of a steady
job…especially for his sister Shizuka. He was the one who
was going to take care of her; that was the least he could do.
“Jounouchi!
Wait up, man!”
He
didn’t cringe when recognizing the voice - it was Honda, not
one of the gang members. Honda had always kept away from the gang, but
he wasn’t exactly ‘innocent’ either -
they both picked on younger students, especially the shy ones, in their
own class. Jounouchi hit him in a friendly manner on the shoulder, by
way of greeting him.
“Hey
man, what’s up for today?”
“Bah,
some chemistry test…Takahana-sensei really knows how to
search out the most stupid assignments.”
“Really?”
Jounouchi couldn’t remember what the last chapter was about,
let alone the most recent assignments.
“Oh
wait,” Honda suddenly recalled, “there’s
supposed to be a transfer student coming in today.”
“This
late in the semester?” He groaned.
Honda
shrugged. “Yeah, obviously. The name’s Bakura or
something. I heard Sukimoto-sensei talk about it.”
Jounouchi
huffed. “School’s boring.”
“Hey,
are you going to see your sister this afternoon?”
“Of
course!”
Honda fell
silent after that, and Jounouchi shot him an impatient glare. He was
very protective of his sister, and he didn’t need his best
friend to go after her. Besides, didn’t he have Miho to make
calf eyes at? It was tough enough already to keep the local playboy,
Otogi Ryuuji, away from Shizuka. He all but gasped when Honda elbowed
him.
“Hey,
it’s Mazaki.”
Jounouchi
groaned again. He didn’t dislike the girl, but to say that he
did like her was an exaggeration - she was a bit
pushy, that was all…and she’d been best friends
with that Mutou kid. He snorted in remembrance. Mutou Yuugi
had been one wimpy, whiny boy, with his constant babbling about puzzles
and games. He’d been the perfect victim for bullying, though
- he always kept to himself, he was small and had the freakiest looking
hair Jounouchi had ever seen. Yes, a perfect and easy
victim…too perfect, as he’d left school
permanently a few weeks ago, and Jounouchi was very certain their
constant bullying had something to do with it. Not that he cared much;
he cared only for himself and Shizuka.
“Jounouchi,
Honda,” the girl greeted them when she caught up with them,
her uniform prim and proper, book bag slung over her shoulder as well.
“Morning,
Mazaki,” Honda grumbled, but she wasn’t one to be
deterred.
“I
trust you two to have studied extensively for
Takahana-sensei’s test, hmm?” she all but
sing-songed, both their disastrous grades a public secret.
“Chemistry’s
stupid,” Jounouchi answered intelligently, stuffing his hands
in his pockets.
“There’s
supposed to be a transfer student coming in today,” Anzu
said. “In our class!”
“It’s
not that big of a deal,” he said, kicking
a pebble away. “What’s with the enthusiasm? There
are more exciting things I know of.”
“Yes,
like hanging out with your gang friends,” Anzu snorted,
shaking her head. “Or spending all your time picking on
younger students. You leave this new student alone, do you hear
me?”
“Who
died and made you class president?” Honda asked as they
walked through the large gates, entering school property. Anzu glared
at him, but didn’t answer and suddenly waved. Honda blushed
furiously; Nosaka Miho returned the wave and Jounouchi chuckled,
knowing that Honda imagined she was waving especially to
him.
“Class,
please welcome Bakura Ryou,” Nagobana said, and the class
rose obediently to bow before their new fellow student. The class
president, Jounouchi always forgot his name, delivered a short
welcoming speech to the white-haired boy who didn’t seem to
be nervous, but not exactly at ease either. He grinned to himself. Yes,
this Bakura Ryou was the perfect next victim to pick on.
“Tell
us about yourself, Bakura-san,” the class president said,
smiling pleasantly. That startled the young man a bit, but he returned
the smile quickly, if a little flatly.
“My
father works in the archaeological field,” he said, his voice
soft. “He travels all around the world, but mostly to Africa,
and Egypt in particular. He even brought me a pendant from one of his
travels. Because he’s so often away, I live on my
own.”
A faint blush
colored his cheeks, as if he was embarrassed to talk about himself.
“Welcome,
Bakura-san,” the teacher said again.
“Now…let’s see where you can sit. Ah,
there’s a desk free next to Jounouchi,” he pointed
out.
It raised a
storm of protest from the girls, who already had set their sights on
the polite and friendly new classmate, but he simply walked forward and
took his seat next to Jounouchi.
“Hello,
Jounouchi-kun,” he said.
“Welcome,
Bakura-kun,” Jounouchi answered, showing him a lopsided grin.
The teacher called for the girls to stop their indignant chattering and
tried to bring the attention of the class back to the new chapter from
the chemistry textbook. Bakura opened his book, using his pencil to
take notes, each and every movement calm and composed. What a
nerd.
Jounouchi didn’t stop to wonder why the new student
wasn’t seated at the spot where Yuugi used to sit.
“Class, class, that’s enough,” the teacher said out loud again and turned around to write something on the chalkboard. Jounouchi exchanged looks with Honda, who was very amused that Bakura had been seated next to his best friend. It wouldn’t do Jounouchi’s social status much good if such a sissy would be associated with him. He almost rubbed his hands in anticipated glee, mentally going over their bullying methods.
After lunch,
Jounouchi skipped the rest of his classes, even though the prospect of
cornering and bullying Bakura tempted him to stay. It was still
Wednesday, and Wednesday afternoons were holy to him. Jounouchi took
the bus downtown; he was saving his money for driving lessons, but his
job didn’t enable him to save much. He usually bought
something small for Shizuka as well; she was his sister, she deserved
to be spoiled a little. Life was hard enough for her already. Jounouchi
bit his lip. The disease that had taken away her eyesight had been so
rare and difficult that only a very expensive operation had been the
resolution - money that no one of the Jounouchi family had. Their
parents had divorced when they were still little kids, and Jounouchi
would never forget the moment that they’d been separated. The
car driving off with his little sister crying on the backseat was a
reoccurring nightmare. It had only been a year since they’d
re-established contact; mostly because Shizuka had managed to reach
Jounouchi without their mother knowing. Even though their parents
didn’t want to talk to each other anymore, that
didn’t mean their children wanted to cease all communication
too.
He got off at
the right stop; from here it would only take him ten minutes to the
gates of the institute where Shizuka would be waiting. Jounouchi hated
the word ‘institute’. It was a school for disabled
children, not for the mentally ill. Shizuka never used the word
‘institute’ either, simply referring to it as
‘school’. She’d wait for him every
Wednesday afternoon at the gates so they could spend some sibling time
together. Jounouchi suddenly halted, and turned around.
Behind him
walked an elderly couple, too engrossed in their own conversation to
even notice him. He frowned. He had the feeling he was being followed.
Could it be that someone from Domino High was skulking after him to
keep track of his whereabouts? The school could expel him if he cut too
many classes… but the guidance counselor he recently talked
to about his behavior in class - the man hadn’t a clue what
he was talking about, with his morals and family values -
hadn’t mentioned anything about him skipping school. Great.
If you end up being paranoid, who’s going to look after your
sister, huh?
Jounouchi
eliminated that train of thought and quickly resumed walking - he
wouldn’t want to keep Shizuka waiting. Ah, there she was;
standing outside the gate as she did every Wednesday afternoon.
“Shizuka!”
“Onii-chan!”
Her face lit up like a Christmas tree, a wonderful wide smile gracing
her lips.
Jounouchi
hugged her firmly, lifting her up from the ground in his
enthusiasm. “Onii-chan! Put me down!” She
giggled, wrapping her arms around him to return the hug.
“You’re so strong! Have you been working
out?”
“Hard
work only,” Jounouchi teased her back. He hated gyms with a
passion - he got exercise enough from his job and running around at
school. Besides, he had a fast metabolism; he wouldn’t get
fat anytime soon.
“What
did you have in mind for today?” He looked at her face as
usual, and got hit by grief and sadness, as he did every time he saw
her. Shizuka’s eyes were so vibrant, so lively, such a
beautiful color of hazelnut brown…they were sparkling with
enthusiasm and excitement, and yet they saw nothing. It’s
not fair! Her eyes simply stared into nothingness, and
she’d seen the colors of the sky, of the ground, of his hair,
of her own hair, of everything before…and he
hadn’t been able to do a thing to stop the regressive disease
from taking her eyesight. Shizuka never complained, never blamed him
for anything. If only they had money…he would’ve
sold his soul to pay for the operation.
“I
want to do a little shopping,” she said in return, her hand
lifting up the tell-tale white cane with the red stripes.
“And eat a little bit; I didn’t have lunch
yet.”
“I’ll
buy you a sandwich,” he immediately said. He loathed the
sight of the cane, but there was nothing he could do about it. Maybe,
in the not so far future, if he had a job and enough money saved, he
could look into the possibilities by then. Technology and medical
science moved so fast nowadays, it could be very well possible that in
five or ten years from now, there was an operation technique available
that could give his sister back her eyesight. Until then, he was simply
going to be the best brother he…
“What,
onii-chan?” Shizuka asked, startled as he suddenly pulled her
to the right.
“Sorry,”
he muttered. Jounouchi looked over his shoulder. A woman was walking
behind him, dressed in a dark blue business suit, juggling a cell
phone, her purse and a notebook she was scrawling something into. For a
moment, he thought she’d been a younger girl with chestnut
hair, dressed in a dark cloak, walking far closer to him. That’s
it. No more video games or watching horror movies before I go to bed.
“Onii-chan?”
“Let’s
go,” Jounouchi said, cheerful. “We can’t
keep the sandwiches waiting!”
“You
and your food,” she giggled happily. “I keep
telling everyone that you’re a bottomless pit, and no one
wants to believe me.”
“You’re
establishing quite the reputation for me…” he
said, though he chuckled as well. Shizuka moved her cane, her other arm
hooked into Jounouchi’s, the ticking telling her where to
walk.
“I
really could go for a nice sandwich right about now,” she
said. “We worked so hard this morning that we all forgot
about lunch.”
“What
did you do?”
“Mostly
computer work,” she said, lifting up her hand briefly to
brush a wayward strand of hair out of her face. Out of school, she
usually freed it from the simple ponytail or loose braid, enjoying her
hair flowing freely around her face. “The new speech
recognition software we received is quite difficult, but really handy
once you get the hang of it.”
“I’m
sure you’ll do great,” Jounouchi answered, almost
absent-mindedly. He realized that Shizuka was learning a profession
besides the practical skills she needed to live her life with her
handicap, and he didn’t want her to sit at home and feel
unwanted in this society…but his natural protectiveness for
her always acted up, even more so when they were together.
“You
know I’m going to take care of you, later,” he said.
“Onii-chan,”
she tilted her head, “I know that…but you do know
that I can take care of myself, that I can make my own decisions? I may
be blind, onii-chan, but I’m not completely disabled or
incapable of living my life the way I want to.”
She halted as
he didn’t give an answer to that.
“Onii-chan?”
“It’s
all my fault,” he said.
“No
it’s not,” her voice floated towards him.
“Onii-chan…it’s no one’s
fault. If you really want to place the blame, place it on me. I was the
one to contract this disease.”
“Don’t
you ever talk like that,” he growled. “You
couldn’t help that…”
“And
you couldn’t help it either,” she cut him off.
“Onii-chan, stop beating yourself up so much over it.
I’m in a very good school that teaches me everything I need
to know, prepares me for a profession, and once I’ve
graduated, I’m going to look for a job and live together in a
house with you.”
Jounouchi
snorted, but not disdainfully. Buying a house together was one of their
favorite topics of conversation.
“That
is, if Ryuuji wants to…”
“Ryuuji?”
“He
asked me to be his girlfriend,” Shizuka said, throwing her
hair back and smiling at her brother. Her smile turned even wider, if
that was possible - she showed her white teeth, her face all but
glowing.
“What
did you say to that?” Jounouchi asked, though he already knew
the answer.
“Yes,
of course!”
“And
he’s going to keep us from living together after we
graduated?”
“Of
course not,” she said, still smiling. “Ryuuji knows
how much we mean to each other. I would never give up my onii-chan for
my boyfriend! We’re going to be one big family!”
Jounouchi
refrained from groaning out loud, to not dampen her spirits. She was on
a first-name basis with Otogi, so it was serious, then…he
would’ve to have a talk with the inventor of the Dungeon Dice
Monsters game, and investigate for himself about Otogi’s
intentions with his sister. If they were anything but honorable, he
would let his fists do the talking. Shizuka chattered next to him,
telling anecdotes about her school week, and he listened to her,
wondering how her voice could be so cheerful and happy even though her
life was so hard. She was strong…and here he was, moping
about trivial things - though he wouldn’t call his potential
brother-in-law a trivial thing.
“What was that you mention about a wedding?”
Timeline III, known universe: Domino City, Japan
Pain.
Excruciating pain.
Moaning low in his throat, he tried to open his eyes. His head pounded,
he couldn’t hear or see, and his limbs felt like
they’d been broken…dead weight. He took a sharp
breath as he turned his head a little; the sting of pain almost made
him want to cry out loud. Better stay still and not move too
hastily, he thought to himself. Where was he? It was dark,
but not impossible to see. There was a little light, far in the
distance…he moaned.
All
right, calm down. Think. What happened? Where am I? Can I get up?
Shifting, every little movement agonizing painful, he tried to get up,
but his body finally gave way and he fell down again, the world around
him spinning. Not a very good idea.
It wasn’t cold or warm, it wasn’t raining nor was
the sun shining - where the hell was he? He wasn’t in
immediate danger, so he decided to bide his time and wait until at
least the headache had subsided. He waited and waited…until
it dawned to him that he didn’t know why he was here,
wherever ‘here’ was; that he didn’t know
where he’d come from, or how he had ended up here. That he
didn’t know who he was, what he looked like, what was going
on, and this time he cried out in pain and fear, voice shrill and
hoarse. Panic enveloped him and he cried out loud again and again until
even the movement of opening his mouth to cry was too exerting for him,
and he felt himself slipping away again.
“No…. no….”
“Yuugi!
Anzu’s here for you!”
“Coming!”
Mutou Yuugi
snatched up his Sennen Puzzle, a golden pendant shaped like an
upside-down pyramid, and put the metal chain over his head. Satisfied,
he looked into the mirror, checking the way the Puzzle was secured - he
used to wear it on a rope, but recent events had proven that a chain
would be far more effective.
“I
can’t believe it,” Yuugi muttered.
“What,
aibou?” A voice floated through the room, only audible to the
young teen.
“That
so many people are after the Puzzle, mou hitori no boku,”
Yuugi answered, as if it was the most normal thing in the world to
speak to a spitting image of oneself in spirit form.
“I
am really glad that you have chosen for a more…ah, sturdier
solution,” the spirit said, his crimson eyes resting upon his
home - the Sennen Puzzle. Ever since Yuugi had managed to solve this
mysterious puzzle, his spirit and soul had been reawakened. For what
purpose or reason still eluded the both of them, but he had faith
enough that someday it would become all clear to them. For now, they
had their hands full on finding his memories; as he didn’t
recall anything from his past, and that was the most logical thing to
look for first.
“Mou
hitori no boku...”
“Yes,
aibou?”
“You’re
daydreaming. We have to go to school!”
“Ah,
yes, you are right,” he chuckled briefly and the next second
he was gone, retreating back into the Puzzle. Yuugi smiled to himself. One
day, we’ll find your memories, mou hitori no boku, and then
you’ll know all about yourself and why you’re here.
Until then, we’ll be friends and help each other.
Slinging the book bag over his shoulder and storming out of his room,
Yuugi almost ran over his mother.
“Sorry
about that, kaa-san!”
“Were
you talking to yourself again?” the woman asked, throwing him
a suspicious look.
“S-sorry.”
Yuugi blushed.
“You’re
growing up to be exactly like your grandfather,” she said,
shaking her head though she didn’t sound too sad about it.
“Now, hurry up, don’t keep poor Anzu
waiting!”
“No,
kaa-san,” Yuugi answered and threw her a smile before turning
around and thundering down the stairs. He really should’ve
gotten up earlier - there was no time for breakfast now. Yuugi opened
the door, squinting his eyes at the bright sun.
“Yuugi,
over here,” Anzu waved, her voice clearly indicating that she
wanted to be saved from his grandfather. Mutou Sugoroku was the
proprietor of the Kame Game shop for decades on end, and besides his
love for games he was pretty much renowned for his appreciation of the
female bust size. Anzu was too polite to tell him to knock it off with
glaring at her upper body and she heaved an audible sigh when Yuugi
grabbed her hand and dragged her off to school.
“Bye,
jii-chan! See you later!”
“Really,
Yuugi, your grandfather…” Anzu started when they
were well out of sight. Yuugi was now the one to heave a sigh.
“I
know, Anzu…he doesn’t mean it like that,
really.”
“He’s
a pervert,” she whispered furiously.
Yuugi blushed again, trying to find a way not to belittle his
grandfather’s actions…but he couldn’t
find any, because Anzu was right.
“He
really doesn’t mean it that bad,” he repeated,
willing his blush away. Anzu was far too optimistic and cheerful to let
it ruin her day, and started talking about an upcoming school
performance. She loved to dance, and this year the students of their
class had chosen to incorporate dance in their annual performance.
Yuugi wasn’t really looking forward to it and hoped he could
avoid all the dancing by simply volunteering to help with the costumes
and the stage settings. Mentally going over their classes for today, he
listened to Anzu talking as she was describing her costume and the
dance she was studying.
“I
think red would fit you splendidly,” Yuugi said, blushing at
the thought of Anzu in a form-fitting, long red dress. They halted in
front of the traffic lights. Anzu was very excited about the
performance, as her greatest dream was to go study modern dance in New
York. Only her best and closest friends knew of her ambition - Anzu
wasn’t the kind of girl to flaunt it in everybody’s
face, but she sure loved this opportunity, no matter if it was only a
mere school performance, to demonstrate her skills.
The traffic
light went green and Yuugi already took a step forward, still listening
attentively to Anzu describing the costumes for the dance. His feet had
barely touched the asphalt when he heard the girl screaming his name.
“Yuugi!”
“Pharaoh!”
“Wha…?”
Yuugi looked up, realizing in a split second that a car was approaching
him, fast.
No doubt someone who had ignored all the red lights and was speeding up
in the hope to win maybe a few seconds to arrive faster at his
destination, oblivious to the pedestrians. Fear nailed him immediately
to the spot, and he opened his mouth - to scream, to…what,
actually? He was going to die - the car
didn’t stop, wasn’t able to stop in time, it was
only a matter of time before he would be hit, and pain would crush his
body and the only thing he could do was staring at the headlights,
stare at the lights coming at him.
A flurry of
dark brown and something akin to gold latched onto him, and instead of
the expected pain he was all but lifted up and thrown to the ground,
still painful, but anything was better than being run over. Yuugi felt
his skin bruise and scrape, hearing the fabric of his school uniform
tear and in the briefest of moments, he imagined his mother being
really angry with him for ruining his clothes.
“Ouch!
Ow ow ow!” He was undoubtedly bleeding, and his hands hurt -
when Yuugi caught a glimpse of them, he saw nothing but blood and raw,
red skin. Instinctively, he had put his hands forward to catch his
fall; painful, but he’d survive. It took him a moment to
realize that Anzu was still screaming his name, and that
someone…someone was holding him at the
waist. He tried to struggle, pain flaring through his body.
“Easy,
easy, my Pharaoh…! You are safe now…”
Yuugi was
flabbergasted. “What? Who’s talking?
Anzu...?”
An arm slipped
around his shoulders, and he was turned around, eased down on his back
on the ground, but he didn’t feel either asphalt or
concrete…it was as if he was floating, being cradled like a
baby. He looked up, though his vision was a little distorted, the shock
of the near-death-accident still fresh.
Dark eyes,
chocolate brown with golden specks, stared intently down at him.
“Pharaoh…Pharaoh,
we finally found you!”
That
wasn’t Anzu’s voice. It was a female voice, but
lower pitched and not panicked like Anzu’s had sounded just a
moment ago. What happened? The approaching
car…
“It
is going to be all right. You are safe now.”
A male voice,
distinctive, soothing, friendly yet distant. Respectful…in
awe. Yuugi didn’t understand; why did they keep referring to
him as “Pharaoh”? He wasn’t
one…what was going on?
“Ouch,”
was the only thing he could mutter.
“Mana,
tend to his wounds,” the man said, the unspoken
‘please’ hanging in the air. Yuugi tried to make
out a face, to see who was talking, but for some reason his vision was
blurred. Concussion? But he hadn’t hit
his head, had he? It had all happened so fast…
“Yuugi,
Yuugi!”
“Anzu…”
“Yuugi!”
He tilted his
head towards the direction the sound was coming from, and he heard
footsteps as well; Anzu was coming for him. She would know what to
do. He felt light-headed, and he didn’t know if it
was from the shock or if he really had hit his head. He barely felt any
pain though, just a slight stinging sensation, barely anything compared
to just a minute ago - he felt so at ease all of a sudden that he
wanted to fall asleep.
“Yuugi! You scared me to death! Thank you, thank you, thank you so much for saving him!”
Anzu’s
voice was still panicked and excited at the same time, and he heard the
thud of her book bag being dropped to the floor.
Finally, she
appeared into view - a blur of blue eyes and brown hair, and her mouth
moved, but he could barely hear her.
“How
many fingers am I holding up?” Anzu held up three fingers,
ignoring the man and woman next to Yuugi, as well as the curious
bystanders. Her heart was beating wildly in her chest; she’d
been so scared that the car was going to hit her best friend and she
couldn’t have done anything to stop it. Feeling guilty and
relieved at the same time, she focused her attention on the small boy,
wanting to know if he hadn’t hurt himself too much.
“Yuugi,
answer me. How many fingers am I holding up?”
“Fifteen,”
Yuugi said and suppressed a groan.
“My
Pharaoh, do you not recognize me?” The male voice again, and
Yuugi made a slightly irritated noise. He wasn’t a Pharaoh,
and he wanted nothing but to close his eyes and sleep.
“I’m
not…”
“Master,
I don’t think he’s our
Pharaoh…”
Finally,
someone who understood the situation.
Master? She had a nice voice, that girl: determined, yet
friendly and warm…a little like Anzu, but
more…mature. He smiled as he closed his eyes, giving into
the strange darkness that clawed at his mind, trusting his friend, and
somehow those strange voices as well, that everything would be all
right.
“Yuugi...?”
Soft, cool
pillows supporting his head. The silent rustle of a blanket, a damp
cloth on his brow, and someone calling his name. Yuugi blinked a few
times, trying to focus.
“Hmmm...kaa-san?”
“No,
try again.”
“Anzu...!”
“Yuugi,
you had me worried so much! Take it easy – no, no, no,
don’t try to get up, stay down.”
“Anzu...what
happened?” He rested back, reveling in the cool pillows,
blinking a few more times.
“That
jerk,” the girl growled, keeping her voice low. “He
didn’t even stop to see if you were all right. He probably
wouldn’t have cared if he had hit you anyway, too occupied
with how fast he was driving…” She shivered.
“I’m
sorry,” Yuugi said meekly.
“You
don’t have anything to be sorry for!” Anzu stared
dumbfounded at him. “You had every right crossing the road,
our light was green! The other guy scared the life out of me - he drove
so fast I couldn’t even see what kind of car it
was.”
“Too
bad.” He heaved a small sigh, knowing that it
wouldn’t be of any use anyway - the police wouldn’t
be interested in a near-accident like this. Yuugi felt bad. He could
still see the shock and the worry in her eyes, though she tried very
hard to cover it up by tending to the damp cloth on his brow.
“I’m
really sorry for scaring you.”
“It
wasn’t your fault,” she said.
“I’m glad you’re safe, Yuugi.”
“Who
pulled me out of the way?” He asked, faintly remembering
someone talking to him, calling him “Pharaoh” and
telling him that he was safe…Yuugi tried to sit upright, but
groaned as a jolt of pain shot through his body. He fell back into the
pillows again.
“Lie down,” Anzu repeated, shifting the cloth on his forehead around. She bit her lower lip.
“I
saw that car coming and I could only think of how it was going to hit
you,” she said, her voice wavering. “I
should’ve pushed you out of the way; I should’ve
done something to save you!”
Yuugi shook
his head briefly out of habit, holding back another groan when the
movement made his vision spin again.
“Please
don’t, Anzu. Don’t feel sorry, it wasn’t
your fault!”
The idea of
Anzu pushing him out of the way and getting hit by the car herself was
too horrible to imagine. She wanted to be a professional dancer
– if she were hit and injured her leg, all her dreams
would’ve been shattered.
It started to
dawn him that he wasn’t in his bedroom. He’d simply
assumed he was at home; they hadn’t been that far en route to
school. The colors around him were warm yellow and sandy brown, very
much unlike the sky blue and light gray of his bedroom. When he
– carefully – turned his head, he saw a wooden
dresser, the golden knobs crafted to resemble certain animal heads. A
small, embroidered piece of linen covered the dresser, protecting the
wood from the porcelain water bowl on top of it. Anzu dipped the cloth
into the bowl, squeezed it and put it back on his forehead again.
“Where
are we…?”
A door opened
as if to answer him, and Anzu startled, standing up from her chair and
clasping her hands together, almost like a kid caught with her fingers
in the cookie jar. A girl, slightly taller than Anzu, walked over to
him, a warm smile tugging at her lips.
“How
are you feeling, Prince?”
“Pr…Prince?”
The confusion on his face spoke volumes, and his eyes went even wider
when he saw the girl approach. Now that he saw her up close and
personal despite his fuzzy vision, he blurted out: “Black
Magician Girl?”
Her smile grew
wider, her eyes mirroring the warmth, her friendly face open and
honest. Her large, round eyes took him in, examining him, and she shook
her head briefly.
“You
are the Prince, not the Pharaoh,” she said and her voice
sounded…dejected. Chestnut hair in wild bangs framed her
face, her traits exactly as he remembered it from the card in question
– which was absurd. No one could resemble a fictional person
from a card game this well.
Yuugi stared
at her, noticing how she was dressed in a robe, almost majestically,
that flowed around her body, loosely tied at the waist with an
embroidered sash. The long sleeves hid her hands from view, just as the
formless robe hid the outline of her body; the mass of fabric rustled
around her as she sat down, reaching forward to take the damp cloth
from his head.
“I
apologize,” she said. “It wasn’t
my…our intention to meet you so soon. We were only wandering
around…when we saw what was about to happen to you. Forgive
us for acting so rash, Prince. We were only trying to do our
best.”
“I
don’t understand a word,” Yuugi said, throwing a
questioning look at Anzu, who wore the same baffled, confused
expression. “I just want to go home, I don’t
understand…”
“Everything
happened so fast,” the girl continued, ignoring his words.
“My master wasn’t able to prevent you from hitting
your head, but he did get you out of the way before any…more
damage could’ve happened. You’ll meet my Master as
soon as you have rested.”
Yuugi frowned.
Master? What was the girl talking about, and what
was this “Prince” and “Pharaoh”
thing? Shouldn’t he be in a hospital instead of with
strangers? Out of habit, his hand went to his chest, fumbling around
for…
“Your
Puzzle is close to you,” the girl said, eyes flickering over
to the right. “Don’t worry, we won’t take
it from you. If anything, we’re protecting you from losing
it. You’ll need it, Mutou Yuugi. Prince.”
“Why
do you keep calling me that?” This was getting stranger by
the second – if his head wasn’t pounding so much,
he would’ve stood up and made himself scarce.
“Because
you are the Prince,” she answered, rising
up from the bed, mattress squeaking. “There’s time
to discuss this later. For now, you need to rest.”
Anzu rushed
immediately to Yuugi’s side again as soon as the other girl
had left the room, closing the door silently behind her.
“Who
are those people? Why are we here?” He looked up at her,
hoping that she would know the answers.
Anzu gave him
a confident smile, masking her own insecurity. “She told me
to call her Mana, but she didn’t tell me how to call the
man…the one that saved you. He was incredibly fast getting
you out of the way of that oncoming car, but I’ll be
eternally grateful for his quick action. She refers to him as
‘Master’, and he said
‘Apprentice’ to her once. He hasn’t
spoken much but insisted taking you here, telling me that the
‘Pharaoh needed care and rest’. He said that they
were the only ones able to give him that…”
“I’m
not a Pharaoh,” Yuugi protested.
“I
think they realize that by now as well,” Anzu
couldn’t help but remark dryly, then she adjusted the damp
cloth on his brow again. “If they would do us any harm, they
would’ve done so already, Yuugi. I don’t know about
you, but I feel strangely safe here…as if nothing can harm
us.”
Yuugi nodded,
drawing comfort from her gentle touch, and sharing her sentiments. It
did feel safe here, comfortable and warm, with no need for panic or
fear at all. This strange woman, and her even stranger
‘Master’, hadn’t touched the Puzzle or
tried to keep it away from him. From this angle, he could see it
sitting on a stool, the heavy chain curled up around it.
Anzu threw him
a quizzical look. “Why did you say ‘Black Magician
Girl’ to her?”
It took him a
few seconds to answer. “Because she looks like her?”
“Yuugi,
I don’t spend that much time looking at
Duel Monsters cards. Not everyone can dream the game like you
do.”
He smiled a
little sheepishly. “She looks the same but for the color of
her hair… the way it falls, the way she looks, her
eyes…”
Anzu poked him
gently. “I think you’re more than just obsessed
with the game, Yuugi. Duel Monsters don’t come to life but
during duels, and only thanks to the technology Pegasus used.”
“Yeah,”
Yuugi mumbled. Duelist Kingdom ended only a few weeks ago, though it
felt like merely yesterday to him. The gaming tournament had made him
more aware of his Other, the spirit of the Sennen Puzzle, or his
‘other self’ as he used to refer to him. Together
they had won the tournament and freed their grandfather’s
soul; a feat they couldn’t have accomplished without the help
of their friends.
If it
weren’t for the high stakes of the game, Yuugi
would’ve enjoyed the thrill of the duels, the holographic
technology Pegasus had used to bring the Duel Monsters to life, the
excitement of winning or losing…but in the end, Duelist
Kingdom had taught him that evil forces were at work, unfriendly people
who were after his Puzzle or his life, and wouldn’t stop for
anything.
“You
better rest,” Anzu said. “I’ll go see if
I can call our parents, all right?”
Yuugi nodded,
his eyes already sliding close. He was feeling a lot more at ease now
that he knew where his Puzzle was, and she scowled a little. She
didn’t quite always understand the bond between Yuugi and the
Puzzle, but she knew about who was residing in the object. Yuugi’s
Other.
Straightening herself, she waited until his breathing steadied before
turning around to leave the room.
As the man had
carried Yuugi to their dwelling, Mana had carried Anzu’s book
bag, and she had been too busy fidgeting over the semi-conscious Yuugi
to pay attention to it. She didn’t know where it was, and it
held her cell phone - she needed it to call the others, who would
probably be worried sick; it wasn’t like them to miss school.
There was no
one in the hallway, and delicious food scents wafted towards Anzu
– was it already lunch time? She had lost sense of time ever
since the accident; she hadn’t even taken a look at her
watch, constantly guarding Yuugi.
Who
are these people?
She was curious, yet careful. They had both been very adamant in taking
Yuugi to their dwelling, insisting that they were the only ones being
able to give him the right care and treatment – and Anzu had
no choice but to follow them…not that they stopped her from
doing so.
“Lunch
will be ready soon,” a female voice piped up behind her and
Anzu almost screamed, turning around swiftly, head snapping.
“I’m
sorry, I didn’t meant to scare you,” the girl said
and smiled at her. It was such a friendly and warm smile that Anzu was
compelled to return the gesture, though hers was a little wary.
“My
name is Mazaki Anzu,” she introduced herself.
“Mana,”
the other answered, and left it at that. “It’s an
honor to meet you, Mazaki Anzu.”
“I
thank you for your care,” Anzu decided to opt for the polite
approach. “We really need to go home…our parents
will be upset if we’re late.”
“I
understand, but the Prince needs to recover, and we will not let him go
before we know for certain he’s feeling well
again.” She didn’t say it in any threatening way
– she was looking so open and honest to Anzu that the other
girl understood it was genuine concern and care, not any malicious
intent.
“Why
do you keep calling him ‘Prince’?” Anzu
couldn’t keep herself from asking, curiosity burning.
Mana’s face turned a little sad, and she was silent for a
moment. Suddenly she moved her hand up, pointing to the open door
leading to the living room. Anzu nodded in agreement and went ahead,
stepping over the threshold and entering the large room, bearing the
same colors as the bedroom - sandy brown, warm yellow and light orange.
Her eyes immediately fell upon the man sitting in the corner, wearing
similar robes as Mana. His were a dark bluish purple, and just as
formless and covering the outlines of his body. He looked up the moment
she entered the room, and she blushed a little. His gaze was
scrutinizing, dark brown eyes with golden flecks piercing through her
as if she was x-rayed. His chestnut hair was tied back in a loose
ponytail and he was wearing something around his neck, obscured by the
large folds of his robe. It looked like a golden collar to Anzu, but
she didn’t inquire - it would be way too impolite, and she
was more curious about them than their accessories.
“Apprentice?”
His voice was low and curt, but not unfriendly.
“Master,”
Mana answered, “Mazaki Anzu has the right to know.”
“To
know what?” she asked meekly.
“The
answer to your question,” Mana said matter-of-factly and
smiled.
Anzu blushed
deeper, feeling extremely silly.
“We
are sorry to have caused this much confusion and grief,” the
man said, though his intonation barely indicated any apology.
“We will leave soon, as not to…”
“Master!”
Mana interrupted him. “We can’t leave, not
now!”
For a moment,
Anzu thought that he was going to yell at Mana as he narrowed his eyes,
a disapproving look on his face for being interrupted.
“If
we cannot find our Pharaoh, we have no business staying here.”
“We’ve
come so far, Master,” the girl pleaded. “We have
found the Prince! He has the Puzzle – he
must know where the Pharaoh is!”
He remained
silent, hands resting on the book in his lap. He’d been
writing; next to his armchair was a small, low table with old-fashioned
writing utensils. Anzu could make out a pot of ink and the small pieces
of a material she couldn’t identify to write with;
hadn’t these people heard of laptops?
“It
is our duty and responsibility to research each world for the presence
of our Pharaoh,” he finally said. “If we cannot
find him, the world is doomed and we have no business staying
here.”
“We
found the Prince,” Mana objected stubbornly.
“Master, we have to be careful in our research. We
can’t condemn a world to a certain fate if we
haven’t studied the circumstances and facts
profoundly.”
A very small
smile showed at the man’s lips. “Very well,
Apprentice. I am glad that you have paid attention after all.”
Anzu still
felt silly, having no clue where the two were talking about. She could
feel the mutual respect between them, a bond that was so strong it was
almost tangible. These two had been through a lot, she was certain of
it; but they hadn’t given up, forging the strength of their
bond with every experience. It was still difficult to grasp what was
going on, and it astounded her why they referred to each other with
‘Master’ and
‘Apprentice’…her mind went back to what
Yuugi had said. She had thought it was because of his concussion that
he thought he saw the Black Magician Girl instead of Mana,
but…Of course. Where the apprentice is, is the
teacher…the Master.
“You’re
the Black Magician,” she stuttered. This wasn’t
possible – this couldn’t be possible. People
didn’t resemble fictional Duel Monsters, it was just a card
game. As the man turned his head more towards her, as his attention had
been focused on Mana, she was, however, very sure - the same stern
look, the wisdom etched in his features, the intensity of his eyes.
“My
name is Mahaado, Mazaki Anzu,” he said. “I do not
know this ‘Black Magician’ you are speaking
of.”
“Who
are you…?” She was squeaking.
“We
have introduced ourselves. That will suffice.” He closed the
book, indicating that the conversation was over.
“Master,”
Mana said, “they have a right to know. We have found the
Prince, he has won the Duelist Kingdom tournament, and he’s
wearing the Puzzle. We know Mazaki Anzu from other
worlds…this world still seems intact.”
“What
other worlds?” Anzu asked, her mind racing about the
possibilities. Mahaado stood up, setting the book aside, next to his
writing utensils. He was quite tall, but not as tall as Kaiba - Anzu
wondered why she briefly thought about the CEO.
“If
the timeline here is not broken, we still have a chance to make things
right,” he nodded. “You are right so far,
Apprentice. If we truly have found the right world, we can work from
here to tie everything together.”
Mana’s
smile had become dazzling, and she clasped her hands together in
excitement.
“Really,
Master? Have we finally found the right world?”
“It
looks like it, if our Pharaoh is present
here,” Mahaado said. “We have to ask the
Prince.”
“Will
we finally see him again? That would be incredible!” Mana
sighed as if she was swooning over this Pharaoh, and Anzu was seriously
thinking she was dealing with very mentally unstable people, no matter
how friendly they were.
Mahaado’s
face was perfectly neutral, though Anzu saw something smoldering in his
eyes. A certain hunger, a desire…this man was very
dedicated, but she wasn’t sure to who or what. To this
Pharaoh? But they kept referring to Yuugi as
‘Prince’…that might mean…
“Are
you talking about Yuugi’s Other? The spirit of the Sennen
Puzzle?” Naming him like this felt strange to her, as she
barely spoke to anyone about it, even between her and Yuugi. They
hardly discussed it; all that Yuugi had told her was that the spirit
had lost every memory he had, not even knowing his own name. He had
helped Yuugi to get through Duelist Kingdom, and she could distinguish
between the two of them if only for his voice…his confident,
deep voice.
“Other?”
Mahaado turned towards her, gazing at her again. “The Prince
knows…he has another personality?”
“We
simply call him the Other Yuugi,” Anzu said, a little meekly.
“We don’t know much about him…he
doesn’t even know much about himself. He has lost his
memory…”
“Gods
protect us,” Mana said and laced her fingers together,
lifting up her hands as if in prayer. “They have shown us
finally the right path…”
“Such
pain.” Mahaado heaved a sigh. “He does not know,
and I am not allowed to tell him.”
“Master…”
“Apprentice.
We have to ask the Gods for their blessings and strength, for we have
finally found the right world. It cannot be any different. We have work
to do.”
Mana looked
upset, her lips quivering and grimacing, while her eyes were shining
with hope and fear at the same time. Finally, her face was set in
determination, and she turned around to leave the room.
“Wait…!”
Anzu cried. “What’s happening? You were going to
give me answers!”
“They
will be given,” Mahaado curtly answered and was about to
follow Mana, when he suddenly halted. Anzu was about to ask again, when
she suddenly noticed the same: Yuugi was standing in the door opening,
a confused expression on his face. She closed the distance between
them, standing next to his side as he held on the doorpost for support.
“Prince,”
Mahaado said and bowed his head, robes flowing around him. Mana made
the same bow, her hands still clasped.
“I’m
just Yuugi,” Yuugi said, “and I’d like to
know what’s going on.”
“You
need to rest,” the girl said. “My healing took your
scrapes and bruises away, but not the pain in your head. You need to
replenish your energy.”
As if on cue,
Yuugi’s stomach growled embarrassingly, and his face flushed.
They were used to lunch at school, and he didn’t have
anything to eat in his backpack. He’d completely forgotten
about food, being in this strange environment, with these strange
people who resembled the Black Magician Girl and…he
didn’t want to think of it. It wasn’t possible
anyway.
Mana suddenly
laughed, a pleasant sound. “I think we need to feed our
Prince before we can talk any further,” she cheerfully said.
“Why don’t you take place around the table?
I’ll be serving you soon!”
She left the
room, laughing softly. Mahaado looked slightly embarrassed, and he
quickly made a movement with his hand, showing Yuugi and Anzu out of
the room.
“If
our Prince would follow me…?”
The dining
room was small, and the only light available was from a rather
old-fashioned chandelier. Anzu liked the atmosphere; the heavy wooden
furniture blended well with the soft yellow colors, and it struck her
that none of the colors were outspokenly bright. It fit them somehow;
maybe they would reveal later how they acquired all this.
Mana came into
the room carrying a huge bowl. She took off the lid and picked up a
large spoon to stir through the food. It was bamya, a
meat and okra stew with a very distinguished scent. Before tasting it,
Anzu could tell there were lots of spices, garlic prominently, in the
dish; curiously, she watched how Mana served Yuugi first, then Mahaado,
then her and finally she took care of her own plate. There were small
side dishes of pita bread and lemon wedges, and Anzu was thankful for
the large pitcher of water in the middle of the table.
“Eat,”
Mahaado said and everybody picked up their utensils - and waited for
Yuugi to start. He noticed the eyes resting on him, and with a faint
blush, Yuugi put his spoon into the stew to taste a little.
“I
hope you like it, Prince,” Mana said, beaming at him. He
returned the smile, taking a sip of the water.
“It’s
quite different than what I’m used to,” he said
politely. Mana nodded, enthusiastically eating.
“I
like the fish here,” she said, “especially rolled
up in the rice! It’s sticky, but very tasty!”
“Oh,
you mean sushi?” Anzu asked, barely refraining from coughing.
The hot spices burned her throat and almost brought tears to her eyes.
“Sushi,
yes! There are so many varieties, and they’re all so
nice!” Amusedly, Mana took a slice of the pita bread and
nibbled on it. “The ones with the egg in it
are…”
“Apprentice,”
Mahaado said and she immediately went silent, though she
didn’t seem bothered by him cutting her off.
The food was
good, a little too spicy for Yuugi and Anzu, but it didn’t
satisfy their curiosity. Mahaado didn’t seem to be willing to
talk about anything during the meal, so it went by in relative silence.
Mana passed the carafe of water, refilling when it was necessary - the
twinkle in her eyes betrayed her amusement - and served tea and thick
biscuits after she cleared the plates. Anzu wanted to help but Mana
protested, saying that it wasn’t necessary. Yuugi
wasn’t used to have tea directly after lunch, but he accepted
the hot cup and inhaled the scent.
“You
speak Japanese very well,” he complimented as Mana
straigtened herself and walked over to Mahaado to give him his cup. She
looked over her shoulder, smiling brilliantly. It was obvious they
weren’t from here – their dark skin, their eyes,
the strange markings below it.
“Thank
you, Prince!” She said. “We didn’t need
to learn the language, though! We pick up every language very easily.
It’s just like our clothes; we can make them look like
anything we want so we don’t stand out, even though the real
clothes don’t change…”
“Apprentice,”
Mahaado interrupted her again. She looked a little annoyed this time,
but bit her lip and remained silent. He wrapped his fingers around the
cup and looked at Yuugi.
“Prince,
I once again offer you my apologies,” he said, taking a sip.
“We acted a little rash, but we could not take the risk of
you being hit by that machine.”
“The
car, yes,” Yuugi said. “I have to thank you for
saving me…”
“You
do not need to thank me,” Mahaado said and his eyes went to
the Puzzle, dangling from Yuugi’s neck. “It is my
honor and my duty to watch over the Prince’s life.”
“My
name is Yuugi,” he insisted. “Please tell me why
you keep calling me Prince. It makes me feel...uncomfortable.”
“You’ve
always been the one to see no difference in rank or status,”
Mana said, and she laughed softly. “Modest and kind, gentle
to the bone. The light in many lives, a good friend to all.”
“It
is because of your Puzzle, Prince,” Mahaado continued,
leaving Yuugi to ponder Mana’s words. “That
signifies that you were the one to solve it, after so many centuries.
You are the wielder of its powers, the guardian of right, keeper of the
shadow games.”
“I…”
Yuugi started.
“When
you solved it, the power of the Pharaoh was released and you inherited
his soul,” Mahaado said, looking over the rim of his cup.
“Tell me, Prince, Mutou Yuugi, about that other soul, that
other person, your Other.”
“How
do you know?” Yuugi asked, his hands protectively cupping the
Puzzle. Anxious, he pressed the Item against his stomach. Mou
hitori no boku.
They kept referring to him as a Prince, so by Pharaoh…they
had to mean…his Other. They can’t take
you away from me…he felt tired, the food
satisfying his stomach and pleasantly warming him. His headache
hadn’t gone yet, but he forced himself to ignore the
pounding. It was so tempting…
“What
is the meaning of this?”
Both Mahaado
and Mana jumped up as if they were stung, throwing their seats
backwards. Even Anzu jumped up, never having experienced the
transformation from this close. She almost yelped, realizing at the
last second that he was her friend too - she had
nothing to fear. Anzu sat down quickly again, smiling a little
sheepishly at Other Yuugi; he was definitely different from Yuugi. He
had crossed his arms in front of his chest, sitting upright, posture
far more confident and rigid than Yuugi’s. His crimson red
eyes sternly looked at the other two in the room who stared at him,
both their mouths open.
“Pha…Pharaoh!”
Anzu’s
eyes went wide as she saw Mahaado kneeling, sinking to the floor,
gathering his robes around him as he went down, bowing his head. Mana
looked at Other Yuugi with tears in her eyes, her face wearing a
strange mixture of joy and grief, and she all but fell to the floor to
kneel in a similar manner.
“The
Gods be praised,” Mahaado whispered, his gaze still averted.
“We have found you. This world shall live.”
Timeline
I, Khemet
The servants
bowed to her in passing, but Mana barely paid attention to them. Her
robes flapped around her ankles, the long sleeves covering her hands,
her slender fingers curled into fists. The only jewelry she possessed
was the golden belt, studded with lapis lazuli and ruby gemstones,
holding the fabric. It had been a gift from the Pharaoh - Atemu - and
every time she clasped it around her waist, it made her heart jump for
joy, and plummet into an abyss the second later. It would
never be the same again, would it?
“Mana,
where have you been?”
She lifted her
chin, taking the hood over her dark brown hair down, freeing the long
strands from the confinement.
“Priest
Akunadin,” she said politely, looking him straight in the
eye, pretending his left one was a normal eye, not a golden ball.
“How does this morning find you?”
“Quiet
for now,” he answered, his voice slightly raspy. She had no
idea about the man’s age; she barely interacted with him in
the first place, despite having the same function as a Priest. Akunadin
was the one keeping him in the background, observing, oh so sharply
observing – and drawing his own conclusions, plotting to use
his findings to his own benefit. She could never think
anything else of Akunadin but that he was constantly scheming
something, crafting a conspiracy to overthrow the Pharaoh and have his
own son ascend to the throne. It made her feel rather uncomfortable in
his presence, as he had never showed any sign of sympathy or compassion
– but it wasn’t her place to doubt the man. They
had to form a unity of advisors and counselors, not to doubt each
other. She quirked her eyebrows at his answer, but he didn’t
elaborate. Instead, he walked along with her, his plain robe at
ankle-length swishing through the air. A few guards passed them, spears
in hand, and she unconsciously shivered, reminded of the thief
sentenced to death.
Akunadin was
about to say something when they approached the familiar large doors of
the Throne Room, the four guards outside staring at them with
expressionless faces. One of the guards turned around to open the
doors, and…
“It
is unheard of!”
Both Mana and
Akunadin exchanged surprised glances, unable to maintain their usual,
neutral look. In the middle of the Throne Room, Set and Atemu were
bickering, standing opposite of each other.
“My
Pharaoh,” Set said out loud, his deep voice easily heard in
even the farthest corners of the room, “I admit that it
is…unusual, but it certainly is not unheard
of…”
Aishizu was
sitting in a kneeled position, hands in her lap, fingers laced
together. Her eyes were closed – either she was in prayer, a
trance, or very deep in thought. Mana assumed it was the latter, as
praying in the Throne Room like this was very much out of place, and
she wasn’t in a trance as her Sennen Tauk wasn’t
glowing.
Shaadah and
Karim looked as if they had been scolded; both wore an unhappy grimace,
eyes unreadable. It was something between the Pharaoh and Set
– Mana could see they both were angry, though Set had managed
to hide it better than Atemu.
“Where
have you been?” The Pharaoh barked as
soon as he saw Mana and the elderly priest.
Akunadin bowed
immediately. “Forgive me, my Pharaoh, we were held up along
the way,” he said. Mana bowed as well, inwardly surprised
that Akunadin would even think of standing up for her.
“You
are late! Do not let it happen again!” he bellowed.
“My cousin here has placed me in a terribly inconvenient
position, and you slack off around the hallways!”
Mana cringed.
Atemu never referred to Set as his cousin unless he was really unhappy,
but she didn’t need the tone or sound of his voice to
determine that. The Pharaoh was all but red in the face – it
would’ve been funny and something to tease him about if he
weren’t the Pharaoh, able to condemn them all to death in a
heartbeat.
“My
Pharaoh,” Mana started, relieved that her voice was soothing,
exactly the way she intended it. “Will you please tell us
what is wrong, so we can assert this situation and be of any help to
you with our advice?”
He snorted.
“What is wrong? Wrong? The woman is
wrong, that is what wrong!”
Confused, Mana
looked at Set. He had drawn his lips into a tight line, drawing all the
blood out of them.
“Kisara
is not ‘the woman’, and she is not
wrong,” he said, tucking the Sennen Rod in the crook of his
elbow absent-mindedly.
Kisara,
Kisara…Mana remembered her: she was the extremely pale,
white-haired, blue-eyed girl who’d been saved from being
stoned in public. It was during a regular inspection of the city when
Set, together with Shaadah, had stumbled upon the girl, dehydrated and
exhausted. The citizens had been throwing rocks at her, terrified by
her appearance. Mana had seen her briefly, when she was called for her
healing abilities – there was not much she could do but have
the girl have plenty of rest and take care of her dehydration. She had
healed the cuts and bruises, and Kisara had been too exhausted to even
muster up the strength to thank her. The Priestess could recall her
pale skin and those startling blue eyes before they were closed. It was
a certain beauty, yes, but so…completely different. No
wonder the locals were terrified of her.
“She
can’t be judged on the color of her skin,” Mana
said. “She can’t help the way she
looks…”
“She
should not be here,” Atemu said, cutting her off.
“She is like a white demon, infesting our society, corrupting
my Court!”
Mana still
didn’t see the connection, and felt hopelessly inadequate. Master...!
You could’ve calmed him down with a few words…
“My
son has every right to see the woman he has set his eye
upon,” Akunadin spoke up, and a wave of gasps rippled through
the Priests. Even Aishizu opened her eyes. The elderly Priest never
referred to Set as his son in public – neutrality had always
been the preferred course of action. The majority of them had crafted
neutrality into perfection; after the initial shock, everyone bore the
same, set-in-stone expression again. Except for Mana.
“Set
has every right to see the woman he likes,” she said, looking
incredulously at Atemu. He was still red in the face, and her eyes went
down to the Sennen Puzzle, moving with every heave of his chest. That
cursed Item. She was so sure that because of the Puzzle,
Atemu’s mind was blackened and hardened. The Pharaoh she knew
and grew up with would’ve rejoiced for Set to have found
someone he liked.
“Thank
you, but I can speak for myself.” Set straightened himself,
using his height to his advantage, towering over the Pharaoh. Atemu
didn’t step back; instead he looked up, eyes narrowing.
“I
will not have you associating yourself with a woman from outside our
borders,” he spat. “We do not know anything about
her background, she could very well present a danger to all of us
– she is already tearing this Court apart!”
“The
only one tearing this Court apart is you,”
Set spat back. “You are the one having a problem with this!
No one objects to her being here but you. We have an obligation of
hospitality…”
“To
our own people,” Atemu interrupted him
rudely. “The whole town was over her, about to stone her out
of fear. What effect do you think it will have if the girl continues to
stay here? How will people think of their Pharaoh if he welcomes a
white demon at his Court?”
“The
people will still think that you’re their God,”
Akunadin spoke up again. “She’s not a white demon,
my Pharaoh. She’s a fragile girl who had the misfortune to be
born with exceptionally pale skin, and with white hair and blue eyes to
boot. Why are we even discussing this? I doubt she represents any kind
of danger.”
“Are
you objecting?” Atemu turned around, shifting his gaze from
father to son. “Are you objecting to my words? This Kisara
girl is not one of ours, and she will strike fear and unrest into our
people. They were not about to stone her for nothing!”
“She
is my responsibility,” Set cut in. “I will take
everything regarding Kisara upon my shoulders, and I will not stand for
anyone abusing her, mistreating her, or speaking ill about
her.”
He pointedly
looked at Atemu, who still focused his attention on Akunadin.
“My
son is taking every responsibility regarding to the girl,” he
said. “We can either announce to the people that the great
Pharaoh was as kind as to take her in under his roof, reminding the
commoners that hospitality is a virtue, or we can remain silent and
bleed this issue to death. This does not warrant the commotion you are
causing about it, my Pharaoh.”
Mana was glad
that Akunadin was speaking up, but she noticed Atemu’s frown
and his pursed lips, knowing that he was about to erupt.
“I
will not have any of it,” he said, turning around and
stalking towards his throne. “I have a Syrian delegate here
who will hear of this, simply because there are already rumors going
around about the girl. I will not have any of these rumors spread
outside the country, and I will not have any other heads of state think
that I am weak and kind as if to give anyone food and shelter! I will
do so for my own people, but not for strangers with an unknown
background! Khemet will be strong and fierce, not weak and carefully
tiptoeing around!”
“She
is not a demon, she is not dangerous!” Set exclaimed. Karim
almost cringed, not used to his fellow Priest raising his voice like
this.
“She
already has you in your grasp,” Atemu hissed. “Look
at how you are reacting! You have never been this adamant in defending
someone, and certainly not a girl.”
“My
Pharaoh…” Akunadin started, as Set took a step
towards Atemu.
“Enough!”
He sat down on his throne, moving his arms to cross them in front of
his chest. “I will not have this woman in the Palace. She can
be moved to the servants’ quarters, and I do not want to hear
one word about her! Set, you will have all the
responsibility – if something strange happens due to all of
this, it is your head that is going to roll.”
“My
Pharaoh...!” Akunadin protested, but quickly shut his mouth
after one look from Atemu.
“We
will continue with the Court,” he said. “Unless
anyone else has strange, pale floozies hanging on their arms? No? Fine.
Proceed!”
Mana was sure
she could hear Set grinding his teeth all the way from here, and she
quickly moved to stand behind Aishizu. Being close to the other woman
always allowed her to draw some strength, and hopefully today the Court
session would be without any thieves being sentences to death. She
tried to catch Aishizu’s attention again, and the Priestess
showed a soft, all-knowing smile. Mana hadn’t talked to her
about Atemu’s apparent change; she assumed Aishizu simply
wouldn’t have noticed much because she didn’t know
the Pharaoh that well as she did.
Heaving a soft
sigh, she noticed Karim carrying a daunting load of scrolls, and she
almost groaned at the thought that all of them had to be read out loud
and listened to it. Half of these cases could be summarized very well,
but Atemu insisted on listening to every detail – and truth
be told, he had an excellent memory and knew to immediately spot any
discrepancies and mistakes. As he picked up the first scroll, Karim
send an apologetic smile to Mana and she couldn’t help but
smiling back – he was a kind man, disgusted by
Atemu’s earlier accusations and rude remarks. She was sure
she could trust him, but she preferred to keep her own doubts of Atemu
to herself; maybe one day she could talk about it, but not now. In
time, she would be able to bring the old Atemu back, she was sure of
it…and with surprisingly firm determination, she squelched
every doubt about it. He will come back.
The servants
had set the large table for lunch; Set and Akunadin had immediately
excused themselves and left the Throne Room before Atemu himself was
able to protest. Usually they all had lunch together, an excellent
opportunity to socialize and talk about mundane, less burdened things
than state affairs and the threats of war.
Mana walked
next to Atemu as he went to the large table, the servants bowing as
they finished putting the last of the dishes on. She saw the still
warm, fresh loaves of bread, grilled fish, lots of fruit –
dates and figs - jars of honey, some poultry in a sauce she
couldn’t identify yet and warm vegetables. All the Priests
took their own seat, waiting of course for their Pharaoh to be seated
first.
The atmosphere
was shot, despite the dancers and the few musicians in the corner who
were trying their best to alleviate the tension. Atemu didn’t
pay attention to them, stirring with his fork over his plate until he
all but mushed his food.
Mana took pity
on him. It’s not his fault. It’s the
Darkness inside the Puzzle. Master knew about it…Gently,
she reached for his wrist, placing her fingers on the golden bracelets.
“My
Pharaoh, you’re not eating,” she admonished, though
very, very carefully. “Our ruler can’t afford to
faint during the afternoon reports. It’s really delicious,
please try some.”
He pursed his
lips a little, spearing a vegetable with his fork and eating it. Mana
smiled at him encouragingly. For a moment, he looked just his younger
self again, always moping and fussing when eating vegetables.
Maybe all he
needed was distraction. Not their activities in bed, which gave her
still mixed feelings, but maybe a more permanent distraction. She knew
she didn’t need to entertain the idea of becoming his wife.
Not only wouldn’t it be accepted of a Priestess to get
married, she had no illusions – only a very faint hope
– that he would prefer simple, mundane Mana over the exotic
princesses and women who threw themselves at his feet. He could choose
from the most beautiful women; she didn’t stand a chance. A
wife, a child…it would absorb his attention, take away the
sharp edges of his life. Her hand went to her own belly, rubbing over
it once. She knew of certain herbs that could…help her. An
heir would please him, she was sure of it, very sure.
“My
Pharaoh…” she started, but at the same moment a
servant girl took away her empty plate, bumping into her shoulder.
Mana’s eyes went wide as soon as the girl touched her,
gasping out loud.
“Priestess…!
My apologies,” the girl whispered, almost dropping the plate.
Atemu’s fingers tightened around his goblet, and he
would’ve thrown it towards her if it wasn’t for
Mana quickly pushing his wrist down. To her own amazement, he allowed
her to do so, and she looked up at the girl…and she looked
into a mirror.
She
was looking down at herself. She
was staring up at herself. Mana opened her mouth, but words eluded her.
“Mana,”
Atemu said. “Are you all right?”
“Mana?”
Shaadah, sitting opposite of her, worriedly put his own utensils down,
eying her quizzically.
“I’m
fine, really, it was my fault,” she said, as the girl bowed
for her and moved away with the empty plate. Confused, Mana stared at
her own goblet. A masking spell.
Someone in the Palace with knowledge of heka, and
using it to mask her true face. Mana had seen right through the spell,
looking at her own face. That couldn’t be possible
– how could there be another person, looking exactly the same
as she?
“Mana,”
Atemu repeated her name. “You look like you have seen a
demon.”
“I…
I haven’t, great Pharaoh,” she mumbled. Her hand
was still on his wrist, her mind faintly rejoicing that he
hadn’t rebuked her.
As the
servants walked around to provide everyone with new plates and
utensils, Mana kept an eye on them, but she didn’t see her
look-alike anymore. Maybe she had worked too hard…? She had
a lot of administrative tasks, and people called upon her constantly
for healing and medicinal assistance. Nervously, she tried to eat
something of her dessert, but she didn’t taste any of it.
Mana tried to focus back on Atemu, who seemed to like the dessert
drenched in sweet honey, but it was the only thing he really ate. He
still didn’t mind her hand on his wrist, ignoring the glances
of the other Priests; though it wasn’t really a secret that
he slept with Mana, it wasn’t announced all over the Palace
either. She withdrew her hand, unfazed on the outside that he
didn’t say a thing about it, but at the moment she was more
occupied with the strange servant girl than his quirks. She wanted to
excuse herself from the table, but her own fear nailed her to her seat
– she didn’t really want to think who could bring
about to walk around the Palace disguising herself…with her
face.
The afternoon
meal ended in silence. Mana stood up from her chair, bowing
towards Atemu and excusing herself. She immediately walked away from
the table, leaving the others behind. She knew Atemu would probably
visit her later on the day, probably angry about her sudden departure
from the table, but she couldn’t care less at the moment. Not
even her Pharaoh could keep her away from solving this riddle.
It still hurt
her, every day, how he had changed, and how he could get angry over a
silly little thing like a woman’s skin color. What he had
said in the Throne Room, to his own cousin…it was horrible,
and no one was able to calm him down with just a few words like her
Master had been able to, or Shimon. Maybe if he had been
there…but the vizier had been ill and weak for quite a while
now, and Atemu had discharged him from his services, the last honorable
thing he had done to allow the man to spend the last days of his life
in peace and good care. Atemu had never accepted a new vizier, and many
had expected him to promote Set – the hallways of the Royal
Palace had been buzzing with exciting rumors. In the end, neither Set
nor any other Priest was promoted, and Atemu had never talked about
appointing a new one.
Mana searched
through the hallways, knowing her goal. Now that she knew about it, she
could trace the heka that had been used. She
hadn’t forgotten any of Mahaado’s lessons, and her
skill to recognize the magic had never been her forte, but from so
close…? It was as if she had been slapped in the face. Why
would anyone mask her face, what was her intention? Determined, Mana
searched further, until the trail lead her towards her own bedroom. The
audacity! Quickly, she opened the door and gasped for breath
when she saw the girl standing by her bed.
“Who
are you!” She barked, spells running through her mind. She
was able to defend herself, and she wouldn’t hesitate to
throw a fireball at the other…her breathing hitched when she
noticed the girl picking up the covers from her bed, gently smelling
the fabric. Mana blushed furiously; housekeeping obviously
hadn’t had the time yet to change the linens.
“Just
like I remember,” the other spoke, with exactly her voice.
“Only I…have never been that
close to him. I was just a kid. You really love him, don’t
you?”
“What
do you mean? Who are you?” Mana came closer, hesitantly. Fear
and unrest started to stir in her stomach; an ominous feeling of bad
news, waiting to be told.
“Who
I am? Don’t you recognize yourself?” She pulled the
hood of her cloak down. Most servants wore simple shentis, never with a
cloak – her masking spell was really strong if she had been
able to hide all her original clothing as well, as nobody had made any
comment about it.
“Your
heka is…”
“Familiar,
right?” The girl put back the covers, her hand gently
caressing the surface. “It’s yours, Mana. I thought
you recognized it sooner, and I had to get close to you to make my
presence known.”
“For
what? Why are you here?”
“So
many questions, so little time to explain,” the other Mana
said. She looked at the bed, obviously slept-in.
“Yes,
I love him,” Mana admitted, vaguely wondering why she was
speaking about it now. The Mana close to the bed allowed herself to
smile, but it was a saddened, small smile.
“It’s
good that you do,” she said. “Because he has to
die, and you will be the one watching him do so.”
Timeline
II, Alternate Universe: Domino City, Japan
Jounouchi
hopped over the threshold of the class room, swaggering towards his
desk. He was pretty early, early enough to miss Honda on his way to
school. Oh well, his friend would arrive sooner or later - they only
walked up together when they had the chance, not by some kind of
agreement. Dumping his book bag on the desk, Jounouchi’s eyes
darted towards the single desk at the back of the class. He snorted. He
had no reason to be thinking of Mutou Yuugi; the kid had left school
ages ago. He was always keeping to himself, him and his stupid games.
Jounouchi’s standard grin widened a little. Yuugi had been easy to pick on, especially when he started bringing some golden box to school, which he called his ‘own treasure’. The idea of bringing a treasure box to school made Jounouchi almost howl with laughter. Who in his right mind would be such a girl, swooning over a gaudy box with some kind of puzzle pieces inside? He took out a few of his text books. Only once had he been able to take a sneak peek at that supposedly treasure box, and he’d been fast enough to swipe one of the pieces; he’d thrown that one in the school’s swimming pool, amused at the thought of the look on Yuugi’s face when he was about to finish his precious puzzle and noticing that he was one piece short.
Jounouchi
shrugged as he plopped down. It wasn’t short after that
particular incident that the Mutou kid had left school, mumbling
something about helping his grandfather in his Game Shop. Jounouchi
couldn’t care less and had been rather unfazed by
Anzu’s prying, scathing death-glares. She’d been
Yuugi’s friend all along, standing up for him - but Jounouchi
was too much of a bully to understand the girl’s feelings
about it.
Other students
came in, ignoring him for the most part. Jounouchi didn’t
care about that either; he didn’t want that much contact with
his peers either, and he had more important things to think about. Like
his younger sister going steady with the town’s playboy,
Otogi Ryuuji. The guy had his own gaming company, so he had money -
which was a good thing, so he could at least support Shizuka and buy
her pretty things. Pretty things she couldn’t
see…he scowled. Jounouchi, you moron.
“Hey,
Jounouchi!”
“Morning,
Honda,” he said and shoved his seat backwards to put his feet
on his desk.
“Everything
okay?”
“Hey,
more than okay,” Honda grinned. “We don’t
have any PE-lessons for the rest of the semester!”
“What?”
Jounouchi sat up, eyes widened. Contrary to a lot of students, he liked
PE; but then again, he liked being physically active far more than
abusing his brains in class.
“Yeah,
something happened to Karita-sensei,” Honda shrugged, opening
his book bag.
“Apparently,
he fell ill overnight and they had to rush him to the hospital.
He’s in a coma, the loser.”
“Honda-san,
don’t say such bad things about Karita-sensei,”
Miho admonished him, her high-pitched voice grating on
Jounouchi’s nerves. He couldn’t see why Honda liked
the girl so much in the first place - she simply looked and acted like
a ditz to him.
“Of
course not, Miho-chan! I was just telling Jounouchi how bad it is, the
poor guy,” Honda cooed and Jounouchi snorted, leaving his
feet on top of his desk, hands folding behind his head.
“Good
morning everyone,” a soft voice floated towards them.
Jounouchi didn’t even look up, already knowing it had to be
Bakura. The boy gently pulled his seat backwards, barely making a sound
and not commenting on Jounouchi’s left leg slung over his
desk.
“Heh,
you must be particularly having a good morning, Bakura,” he
said rudely. The other looked up, confusion written over his pale face.
“Excuse
me?”
“Karita
is dead.”
“Wh-what?”
“Jounouchi-kun!”
Miho gasped, her eyes wide in horror. “Don’t talk
like that!”
Bakura seemed
to pale even more, if that were possible - the shock draining all blood
out of his face.
“Wh…that
can’t be…Karita-sensei?”
The PE-teacher
wasn’t very popular at school, especially because he liked to
pick on the physically weak. Neither Jounouchi nor Honda had any
problems with the man, but small, slender-built boys like Bakura were
automatically his target. Bakura had had a personal encounter with the
man, who had tugged at his hair and ridiculed his effeminate looks and
long locks. Karita had demanded a buzz cut in the morning, and Bakura
had tried to avoid the large, burly man as he didn’t want to
comply with the ‘request’ - but now his problem
seemed to be solved, no matter how grave the situation was.
“He’s
at the hospital, in a coma,” Honda added. “He fell
ill yesterday, but nobody really knows what exactly has happened.
Bakura sat
down, all but gasping for air. “A…a
coma…oh no…”
Jounouchi
threw him a quizzical look. Bakura looked upset, but not…that
upset. As if he accepted the news without further ado, acquiescing
immediately.
“This
whole town’s going to hell,” he suddenly said,
leaning backwards in his chair again, rearranging his large feet on the
desk. “You all have heard the news about the escaped convict
and his hostage, right?”
Miho nodded,
eyes still wide, as a deer looking into headlights. There had been
nothing else on TV but reports about the prisoner who held a girl
hostage at a hamburger restaurant. He managed to escape after a few
hours, but his hostage and a few witnesses ended up dead. Just like
yesterday, the students were urged to go home immediately after school,
instead of loitering around. Honda sat down as well, turning his chair
to face the others.
“Hey,
Mazaki’s still not around?”
“She’ll
show up,” Jounouchi said, dismissing the girl the next second
from his thoughts. “An escaped convict, and yesterday, when I
was with Shizuka, I was being followed! This town’s going to
hell, I tell you.”
“Followed?”
Miho repeated, frightened.
Jounouchi
nodded. “All the way during the bus ride to
Shizuka’s school…when I picked her up for lunch,
we were being followed. All the way.”
“Did
you see who it was?” Honda asked, tone of voice growling. If
something happened to Shizuka or his best friend, he would be all too
pleased to set things straight with his fists.
“Not
a clue. That was the strangest part.”
“What
do you mean?” Bakura asked softly, his fingers resting on the
small stack of textbooks in front of him.
“Well,
I looked a few times behind me, and every time there was someone I was
very sure of who wasn’t there before. I knew there was an old
man behind me, for example…and when I looked around, there
was this business chick in high heels.”
“Sounds
to me you have a very lively imagination,” Honda snorted.
“You sure you didn’t smoke anything
lately?”
“Not
when I’m going out with my sister, you moron,”
Jounouchi retorted, throwing his pencil to Honda. Some other students
looked up, but quickly looked away again when they saw it was Jounouchi
raising his voice.
Nagobana,
their teacher, entered the class room and shut the door. All the
students ceased talking and rose from their chairs to politely greet
their sensei.
“Sit,”
Nagobana said, and it was clear the man was in a different mood than
usual. Jounouchi sat down just like anyone else, refraining from
flinging his feet on his desk this time. Nagobana didn’t take
out papers or books from his large bag, instead remained standing next
to his desk.
“Class,
you have all heard of the escaped convict,” he said.
“We have issued the rule for all of our students to go home
immediately after class because of this man roaming the
streets.”
“Unfortunately,
he has struck again, holding a hostage to provide for his own escape.
This morning, the police prefect has released details of the hostage -
not to the public, but to the family of the victim…but
because she was a student of our school, it affects us as well. Class,
Mazaki Anzu was brutally killed by this despicable man.”
A collective
gasp went through the class, Miho immediately crying. Everyone looked
at each other baffled and abhorred - even Jounouchi and Honda were
aghast. Anzu? Anzu, from their class? The pushy, tomboyish girl who
seemed to get along with everyone…?
“I
can’t believe it,” Honda said. Bakura looked gray
instead of pale this time, fingers clenching at his books, almost
tearing the paper.
Jounouchi was dumbfounded. Not in a million years had he expect Anzu to die right now, at the hands of a convict, in a hamburger restaurant. What was she doing there in the first place?
Even though he
didn’t care much for the girl, he wasn’t as
heartless as to not feel sorrow and grief; he would never wish this
kind of fate upon anyone.
As the teacher
continued about the family and the funeral process, Miho continued
crying into her handkerchief along with the other girls; Jounouchi
didn’t know what to think. His own
‘problems’ about being followed seemed absolutely
nothing compared to this, and when Nagobana suggested they should
continue the class in respectful silence, even Jounouchi was meekly
holding his tongue.
“It
just can’t be right, man,” Honda said. He had said
it twice before, and undoubtedly would say it a few times more.
Jounouchi grumbled, slouching as he walked over the pavement.
“I
hope they catch him, and kill him too,” he snarled.
“That
won’t be much of a consolation to her family.”
“No,
true…maybe it’s some kind of consolation.
Man…this is bad.”
“Did
you know Anzu was working at that restaurant? Burger World?”
Honda asked.
“No?
She was working there?” Jounouchi raised
an eyebrow. After-school jobs were against the rules, and he was one of
the few allowed to keep his work delivering newspapers because it was
his only way to pay for his tuition.
“Apparently,”
Honda answered. “She was at the wrong place at the wrong
time…”
“If
she hadn’t accepted that job, she wouldn’t
be.”
“She
was saving up for her studies,” Honda said.
“What
did she want to study then?”
“Dance
in New York.”
“Sheesh.”
Jounouchi
kicked a pebble, not knowing why he felt so miserable. It
wasn’t his sister…as long as Shizuka was all
right, everything was all right…right?
“I
hope they catch him,” he repeated, “and kill him on
sight. No one has the right to take one another’s life
and-”
His sentence
was cut short as someone yanked at his collar. Before he could react,
he was dragged over the ground, and he started kicking with his feet.
“Let
me go! Hey! Heey! Honda…!”
Jounouchi
flailed with his arms, trying to find support, something to hold onto,
regaining his balance to start fighting. He moved his feet, dragging
his heels. He didn’t hear anything from his friend, and a
thousand thoughts spun around in his mind. Was
he the victim of the escaped criminal now? Hirutani and his
gang? Robbers? Jounouchi almost choked as the grip on his collar made
the fabric of his blouse cut into his skin and he coughed out loud.
Suddenly, he was released and thrown against a wall.
Heavily
coughing, he looked up, his eyes searching out his attacker. A tall man
was standing in front of him, with eyes that drilled holes into his
very soul. Every smart-assed response Jounouchi could come up with
melted away - this man wouldn’t take kindly to that kind of
response, that was clear.
“Where’s
Honda?” he managed to growl.
“At
least you are still thinking of your friend,” the man
answered, voice low but composed.
“That
speaks to your honor, Jounouchi Katsuya.”
“What
do you want? Who are you?”
He was
ignored. Jounouchi clenched his hands into fists; he would jump up and
nail the guy, as soon as the weird feeling in his legs would disappear.
At the moment, they felt like lead; he had to shake it off of him
before he could even think of a fight.
“Where
is the Pharaoh?”
“Whu-what?”
“The
Pharaoh. Where is he? Answer me!”
“Take
it easy!” Jounouchi bellowed, confused. “I
don’t know any Pharaoh. If that’s the name of some
kind of thug, I-”
“Do
not even dare to think to talk about him like that!”
Jounouchi
gasped for breath as an invisible hand clenched itself around his
throat. Fear clawing at his mind, he briefly wondered if he had gotten
himself into something way over his head…Shizuka. I
can’t give up!
He brought up
his hands, but found quickly nothing to pry off of his throat. Instead,
that whatever that held its grip on him tightened it, and he coughed
again, fighting for the next gulp of air.
“What…what
do you want?”
“The
Pharaoh. I want to know where he is. He is not in this world! How is
that possible?”
“I
don’t know…what the hell you’re talking
about!” Jounouchi cried out. He was not
going to say ‘please’. But…Shizuka…who
was going to take care of her if he wasn’t around any more?
Otogi, who probably would exchange her for a new toy whenever his eyes
fell upon another woman?
“You
are supposed to be friends with him.” The grip around his
throat was loosened, and he took a deep gulp of breath, relieved.
“I’m
telling you, I don’t know anyone who goes by that name. Not
in the streets, not at school...”
The man took a
step closer. Jounouchi was now better able to see him: a stern man,
with chestnut, shoulder-length hair, weird markings under his blazing
eyes, something akin to gold around his neck, and clad in a dark,
purplish robe. Freak!
“Hey
man, I want to help you, but I don’t know what
you’re talking about.”
“Stand
up. Stand up!”
With the force
around his neck gone, Jounouchi found the strength to obey the
man’s order, albeit grudgingly. He worked himself back up on
his feet, coughing a few times, touching his throat. That was going to
hurt even more later, probably a spectacular bruise.
“Friends…if
you’re talking about Honda…”
“No.
You are supposed to be friends with the Pharaoh. More so, you would
give his life for him, as he would do for you. This world does not feel
right.”
Jounouchi
didn’t bother to hide the irritation in his voice.
“You could at least say ‘sorry’ for
attacking me, man…”
“Where
is the boy with the Puzzle? Do you know him?”
“A
kid with a puzzle? Yeah, I know a kid with a puzzle,”
Jounouchi said, dusting off the sleeve of his jacket. He had to pay
himself for his school uniform; fortunately, it wasn’t torn.
“Where is he?”
“Do
I look like a fucking tourist office to you?
‘Where’s the Pharaoh’,
‘Where’s the kid with the
puzzle’…fuck you!”
“Master?”
Jounouchi
snapped his head to the right, hearing a girl’s voice and his
jaw went slack when he saw Honda, face blank and eyes lifelessly,
walking next to a girl with similar thick, chestnut hair, the strands
framing her face.
“What
the hell did you do to Honda!”
“He
is fine,” the taller man answered. “He will not
remember anything of this, and you either, Jounouchi Katsuya. I only
want to have some answers.”
“Leave
me alone,” he said, though half-heartedly.
“You
are an important link in this world,” the man continued,
ignoring him. “What you can tell me is
important…think about that.”
“I
can’t help you if I don’t know what
you’re talking about,” he muttered in reply.
“Apprentice,” the man nodded at the girl. She snapped with her fingers, and Honda blinked a
few times.
“Jounouchi?
What the hell…?”
“We’re
captured by idiots,” Jounouchi growled. Now that he was
standing upright and feeling better again, his hands were clenched into
fists. He noticed Honda doing the same - like the buddies they were,
they would face their enemies together.
“Stop
that,” the man said. “You do not stand a chance
against us. Tell me all you know about the Prince.”
“Prince,
Pharaoh, whatever,” Jounouchi said before jumping, his fist
high in the air to hit the man square on the jaw. His face already
split in a devilish grin, a fight providing him with the adrenaline and
a welcome distraction from the earlier events. He knew Honda was
lunging forward as well, both their attacks aimed at the man,
dismissing the girl as if she never existed.
It
didn’t take long for his grin to turn into a grimace,
gritting his teeth. Jounouchi felt heavy and light at the same moment -
light enough to leap through the air, fist aimed at the man, and heavy
as lead as he wasn’t moving forward, not an inch. His brain
needed a few precious moments to process the idea that he was
frozen…in mid-air. Honda was next to him, aiming low at
their supposedly victim; he too was frozen in mid-air, the only thing
moving were his eyes. They shot back and forth rather panicked,
and Jounouchi couldn’t help but feeling extremely
stupid.
“Good
work, Apprentice,” the man spoke calmly, as if he
wasn’t facing two young boys floating in mid-air with their
fists clearly aimed towards his face and stomach. The girl suddenly
giggled, shifting around and revealing some kind of wand, her slender
fingers wrapped around it.
“Thank
you, Master…!”
“It
is all right, please allow them the ability to speak.”
Jounouchi
found his mouth working again, and used his rediscovered ability
immediately to fling a colorful row of expletives at the man and the
girl, as usual followed by Honda.
“Are
you finished?” the man interrupted him after five minutes,
understanding there wouldn’t be an end to it any otherwise.
“Yes,
asshole,” Jounouchi answered.
“Fine.
Realize I can take away your beloved speech indefinitely.”
“What
is it you want?” Jounouchi repeated, growing tired.
“I don’t know any Pharaoh.”
“My
name is Mahaado,” the man introduced himself. “This
is my Apprentice, Mana. The origin and existence of our powers are not
for you to know, or any of your interest.”
With a gesture
of his hand, they were released from their frozen state and both
Jounouchi and Honda fell promptly to the ground.
“We
are looking for the Pharaoh, and it is imperative that we find him,
otherwise this world is doomed.”
“Whoa,
wait there, buddy,” Honda lifted up his hands. “I
don’t know a Pharaoh either, and what do you mean, this world
is doomed? That’s something out of a bad movie.”
“I
think he’s referring to Yuugi,” Jounouchi said.
“He asked me if I knew a boy with a puzzle.”
“Mutou
Yuugi? The kid from school?”
“Yeah!
Remember when he brought that box to class? The treasure box?”
“With
the gold inside?”
Mahaado looked
at Mana and back to the boys again. “What is that about a
golden box?”
“That
kid… Yuugi, he had a golden box with him. There were all
strange markings on it, and it was rather small.”
“What
was inside the box? Pieces of the Puzzle?”
“It
looked like puzzle pieces…” Jounouchi hesitated.
“I don’t know if it’s the
puzzle you’re talking about.”
“Do
you know if he finished it?” Mahaado’s voice
sounded urgent, yet…strangely hopeful. Jounouchi resisted
the urge to stall the answer and scratch the back of his head.
“No,
I don’t know. The kid went…away. He left school,
and I’ve barely seen him ever since. He has a Game Shop with
his grandfather, here in town.”
“If
the Prince finished the Puzzle, there is still hope, Master,”
the girl said, a smile showing on her face.
“Yes,
there is,” Mahaado said, and even on his face a very
tentative smile tugged at his lips.
“Maybe
all hope is not lost after all.”
Honda
chuckled. “I severely doubt the kid’s been able to
finish it. Jounouchi dumped a piece of it in the school’s
swimming pool.”
“Yeah,
that was the most awesome joke ever,” Jounouchi grinned at
his friend and would’ve given him a high-five if he
hadn’t caught the look on both the others’ faces.
Mana looked
heartbroken, tears already glistering in the corners of her eyes.
Mahaado drew his lips into a tight line, a cold, stony expression
settling on his face.
“You
did what?” he asked, voice low and curt.
Jounouchi
cringed. Something was telling him that his most awesome joke
wasn’t very well received.
“He was so whiny about it,” he tried to defend himself. “Strutting around like a girl and prancing with a golden box, calling it his treasure! I only wanted to help him become a man.
Men
don’t flaunt golden treasure boxes around.”
“You
idiot,” Mahaado hissed. Mana looked shocked, and Jounouchi
wasn’t so sure if it was of his confession of throwing away
the puzzle piece or hearing the other man calling him names.
“Do
you have any idea of what you have done?”
“It
was just a prank, lighten up,” Honda piped up. “The
kid was a wimpy little...”
“Honda!”
Jounouchi yelled at him.
“…girl,”
Honda finished quickly, suddenly noticing how Mahaado had narrowed his
eyes to mere slits. The girl looked aghast, her eyes saddened.
“It
can’t be possible,” she softly murmured.
“We were so sure…”
“What’s
this all about anyway?” Honda said, trying to cover up his
mistake. Mahaado didn’t answer but fixed him a glare that
made the boy shift nervously from foot to foot.
“This world is doomed. We leave now, Apprentice.” He made a brusque movement to the right, but the girl jumped in front of him.
“Master,
wait!”
“This
is in vain, Apprentice.”
“Master,
please,” she said. “The Prince is here. We can look
him up, and ask him where the Pharaoh is! If we fix the Puzzle, we can
fix the timeline!”
“Timeline?”
Jounouchi repeated, dumbfounded. Honda shook his head, muttering
something about ‘nutcases’ under his breath.
Jounouchi wasn’t so sure about that. The two strangers spoke
with such intensity, and were clearly very convinced of their goals.
Whereas Honda already seemed to have forgotten about it, Jounouchi
hadn’t - it had been the girl who had caught them with
whatever it was in mid-air, and instinctively he felt that the man was
capable of even more. Master and Apprentice. It had to do with Yuugi
somehow; well, that wasn’t difficult to figure out.
“I
can bring you to the Game Shop, where Yuugi is,” he said,
stubbornly ignoring the strange look Honda was giving him. Mana
immediately brightened, seeing a new opportunity for hope.
“Master…!”
Mahaado
scowled. “The Item should never have been broken in the first
place…”
“There’s
nothing we can do about it now,” Mana answered determinedly.
“But if we can find Prince, he can help
us…!”
“Very
well, then,” Mahaado said, but his tone of voice
didn’t hold much hope. He stared at Jounouchi, then at Honda.
“After all, it is fair that the one will bring this world to
its end, will do his best to help us stop the process.”
“Hey!”
Jounouchi protested. “What’s all this talk about a
doomed world? If that has something to do with that puzzle
piece…”
“It’s
just not some puzzle piece,” Mana said, slightly impatient.
“We better talk to Prince.”
“And
pray that he is able to help us,” Mahaado added curtly.
“Master!
It’s Prince - of course he’ll be able to help
us!”
“Enough,
Apprentice. Let us go, then.” He looked expectantly at
Jounouchi, who coughed and took the lead, starting to walk in front of
them. Honda caught up with him.
“Jounouchi,
what the hell is this all about?”
“I
don’t know, man,” Jounouchi answered.
“But this is something different, something big.”
“What
do you mean?” Honda asked, annoyed. “Look at them!
A guy and a girl in strange clothes, talking about the world being
doomed - and you believe them?”
“Yes,” Jounouchi said. He halted mid-step and turned towards his friend. “I believe them.”
“Why?”
“Because…because
it’s too unbelievable to not be true.”
Honda made a
very suggestive gesture with his fingers close to his left temple.
“You’re not serious, Jounouchi…did you
fall onto your head again or something?”
“Quit
it,” he grumbled and whacked Honda on the head, but missed by
a mile, as usual. When he looked to the left, he saw Mana and Mahaado
standing, waiting patiently for him to move on. For one moment, but
long enough, his eyes locked with the tall man – and he was
reminded of the exact reason why he believed him. This man simply
didn’t lie. Every word he spoke was true; even Jounouchi
could feel it into the core of his very soul. He just knew
this man spoke the truth, no matter how strange he looked, no matter
how brusquely he behaved. Jounouchi swallowed, suddenly wanting his
sister close by. He had an ominous feeling, and he wasn’t
really sure if it was because of Anzu’s unexpected death, or
the look in the man’s eyes.
“Hey,”
Honda spoke up. Jounouchi looked at him, faintly irritated as he was
disturbed in his thoughts.
“What?”
“Whatever
it is man, I’m coming with you,” Honda simply
answered. Jounouchi couldn’t help but grin, feeling rather
grateful.
“Don’t
get all mushy on me, you moron.”
“Excuse
me,” Mahaado cleared his throat. “We have a lot of
work to do, if this world is worthy enough of any help to begin
with.”
“All
right, all right, stop pushing,” Jounouchi said, resuming his
walking pace. The GameShop wasn’t that far from here, and he
was curious to what was going to happen. If that wimpy kid played a
part in it, it could become very interesting. He would see Mutou Yuugi
for the first time in years again. Heh, maybe the kid has
grown in time, that would be really funny.
Honda fell in pace next to him, and they both were silent.
Timeline
III, known universe: Domino City, Japan
Hunger.
Thirst.
His stomach grumbled, longing for something to eat. He pressed his
hands against it as if he could silence it; the hunger pains making him
feel weak and fragile. How long had he been…there? In that
small, dirty alley, lying with only his cloak to keep him warm?
“Mahaado?”
he said out loud, the name familiar on his tongue, but estranged in
this world, this place, this…wherever he was. His head
pounded, his stomach was eating itself, and his body ached all over.
Where were his servants? His Priests? Where was…the sun? All
he saw was cloudy, gray sky, and...it started to rain. Soft, wet drops
fell upon his face, and he blinked a few times. He wasn’t
used to rain, not like this – when the Nile flooded, it was
due to heavy rain storms, so much unlike this pitter-patter of drops.
He shivered. He had to find shelter and some food and water before he
would black out again. Why was he feeling so…vulnerable?
There
weren’t any of his guards or Priests around here, but he was
independent enough to take care of himself. The Gods would never leave
him alone, they would never abandon him in such a state
of…despair. This wasn’t his homeland anymore, that
much was certain. He took a few steps forward and hissed when pain shot
through his foot. The fabric of his sandals was much too thin and soft
for walking on streets; a particularly nasty piece of rock had cut
right through it.
Almost
bewildered, he looked around; there were lots of trees and bushes in
front of him, resembling a garden. Where there as a garden, there had
to be a house. If only he could talk to someone, ask about what was
going on… Shivering from the chilly temperatures and the
rain, he quickly moved forward, ignoring the pain in his foot, crossing
a small path to get to the other side - and promptly his way was
blocked by some kind of fence. Confusedly, he touched it. Who in his
right mind put a fence around his garden? He couldn’t
identify the material; it had a gray, smooth surface and there was a
sign attached to it, but he couldn’t read it. These kinds of
hieroglyphs were so much unlike the ones he knew, that he was unable to
make heads or tails out of it.
He saw light
in the distance, a faint, shaky light; there had to be people. The
fence wasn’t that tall; he could climb over it if he was
careful. The strange material was sturdy enough to carry his weight,
even though it rattled dangerously as he started to climb it. People
knew the use of bricks here, whatever made them use this to fence their
gardens? These new knowledge would’ve been fascinating if it
weren’t for him feeling so hungry and thirsty. He
would’ve reveled in all these discoveries, but for now he
only wanted food and shelter. Hissing again, this time in irritation as
he heard his clothing rip, the hem caught in one sharp piece of the
material - it wasn’t as smooth everywhere as he thought,
apparently - he worked his way over the fence, landing in the middle of
a few bushes.
His mind was
clouded with questions – how he had ended up here, what was
going on, where his Priests were…shivering, he continued his
path towards the faint light in the distance.
“I
would like to know what is going on.”
“Pharaoh,”
Mahaado repeated, his voice hitching. Mana looked up, her face lighting
up.
“We
finally found you…we finally found you!”
Anzu
didn’t know what to say. She could very well recall the
moment that Yuugi told her that he had, or rather felt, another
personality inside of him. It all happened after he had finished that
Millennium Puzzle he wore constantly around his neck, and when he has
experienced ‘simple’ black-outs. The moment he told
her and their mutual, best friends Jounouchi and Honda about it, she
had dismissed it as something Yuugi was imagining, or rather
fantasizing about.
She
didn’t deny that Yuugi had gone from rather reclusive and
silent to more confident and courageous, but had chalked it up to him
finally making friends and finding support and strength in their bond.
He’d been bullied and picked on for so long, and though she
tried to help him, she couldn’t be around him 24/7. After
becoming friends with Jounouchi and by default, Honda, Yuugi had been
much happier and confident. There were still things that happened
around him that she couldn’t explain very well, and that
Yuugi could go from confident to downright cocky, even arrogant, was
something that had puzzled her, until she started to believe in his
so-called Other.
Mou hitori no Yuugi.
The
differences in appearance were minimal, and it was mostly his voice and
different posture that made her aware of him. Duelist Kingdom had
changed much between them, deepening the bond between the friends.
Yuugi was Yuugi, Jounouchi had exclaimed, and Honda had agreed.
She remained
silent, staring at the Other Yuugi. His features were strained, masking
his confusion and uncertainty about the situation.
“I
would like to know what is going on,” he repeated.
“Pharaoh,”
Mahaado said. “Now we found you, everything will be all
right.”
“This
world is safe,” Mana mumbled.
“Finally…”
“Stand
up,” he said, “Explain yourselves.”
Mahaado stood
up, followed by Mana, and they exchanged a quick look at each other
before taking their seats again, silently.
“Why
do you keep referring to me as Pharaoh, and to my aibou
as Prince?”
“Because
that is what you are,” Mana simply said.
“Mana,”
Mahaado interrupted her. “We have to be careful with what we
say.”
“Why
is that?” Anzu asked. “What is it that you
can’t…don’t want to tell us?”
“It’s
not up to us,” Mana said, her voice dropping from its
previous cheerful tone to a lower, darker one. “We
can’t disturb the timelines any more than they already
are.”
“With
anything we say or tell you, the risk of disturbing or even destroying
timelines becomes greater,” Mahaado continued.
“This is the most intact timeline we have found so far, and
we intend to keep it that way - only when it is intact enough, we can
work from here to save the world…and other worlds as we know
it.”
Anzu’s
face fell. She didn’t like all this talk about
‘saving the world’ and how Yuugi was involved in
it…he and his Other, somehow. Hadn’t they been
through enough already, when they had to make their way through the
tournament at Duelist Kingdom, defeating Pegasus to free their
grandfather’s soul?
“I’m
not sure what’s going on here…” She
said. “Mou hitori no Yuugi?”
He
didn’t answer her, but not out of impoliteness; his attention
was completely focused on Mana and Mahaado.
“Timelines,
other worlds. You bear uncanny resemblance to
certain…inanimate characters from a card game, and your
names are unfamiliar to me.”
“You
do not have your memory,” Mahaado said, his tone of voice
somewhat hurt, even though he already knew. “That strengthens
our belief that this truly is the right timeline, as it was supposed to
be…” He suddenly gasped.
“Master?”
Mana asked, worriedly.
“It…”
Mahaado widened his eyes. “It is supposed to be like
this,” he covered up the sudden disturbance. “How
painful it might be, Pharaoh, at this moment you are supposed to have
lost your memory. Do not worry, you are well on your way to recovering
them.”
“Can
you look into the future?”
“We
know how the timeline needs to be restored, and we have a vague outline
of what’s to happen next,” Mana supplied. She
didn’t take her eyes from Mahaado, a light frown visible on
her face.
Anzu bit her
lower lip. “What is it that will happen next?”
“You
know someone by the name of Kaiba Seto, right?”
“Yes…?”
“He’ll
be all over city soon, announcing his new tournament, called the Battle
City Tournament. It‘ll be very important for you to
participate in it, Pharaoh.”
He shifted
slightly uncomfortably in his chair. “We have recently won
another tournament, called ‘Duelist Kingdom’. If
there are answers to be found while participating in Kaiba’s
tournament, I will do so.”
“The
Eye,” Mana said to Mahaado and he nodded, still obviously
disturbed.
“It’s…it’s
not fair that Yuugi isn’t hearing all of this,”
Anzu suddenly spoke up. “It’s important to him as
well. We all promised to help you to find your memories, mou hitori no
Yuugi, but it doesn’t feel right shutting Yuugi
out.”
“I
am not shutting him out,” he defended himself. “He
is tired, and a little upset from the events. I do not wish for him to
get even more worked up.”
“Yuugi
might be upset, but he’s not too fragile to hear this. If
this really is about the future, he has a right to know.”
“Mazaki
Anzu is right,” Mahaado said. “There is a way we
can solve this.”
“Master,
no,” Mana objected. “It’ll take too much
out of you, and we still have some…things to take care
of.”
“You
will need to go to Khemet by yourself,” Mahaado replied.
“You can make that jump on your own.”
“But
Master…”
“Apprentice.”
The girl
muttered something under her breath, clearly unhappy with the decision.
Shaking her head, she looked at Anzu, giving her a small smile.
“What…?”
Mahaado rose
from his chair again, taking a few steps back. He closed his eyes in
concentration, bowing his head a little, right hand pressed against his
forehead. A purplish glow surrounded him, and Anzu put her hand on
Other Yuugi’s arm, fingers clenching at the fabric of his
sleeve. He kept an eye on Mahaado, his hand cupping the Sennen Puzzle,
as if seeking comfort in holding it. Still, he didn’t feel
any reason to be alarmed - despite the things they were telling him,
despite how they behaved, these two had showed no intention of harming
him. He felt strangely at ease with these people, both calling forth a
familiar feeling in him of safety and security. His train of thought
was roughly interrupted when pain took over his body and he tensed up.
“It
is done soon, Pharaoh…my apologies for the
discomfort,” Mahaado mumbled, barely audible enough to
overhear.
Anzu held on
to Other Yuugi, slightly worried when she saw him clenching his teeth.
“Are
you all right?”
“It…it
feels like something is tugging…forcefully at me,”
he managed to say before the purplish light surrounding Mahaado started
to surround him as well, turning a pale blue. Anzu gasped, tightening
her grip on him. Right in front of her eyes, Yuugi appeared, his body
ethereal, basking in the pale blue light. The outlines of his face
became clearer, and his eyes widened in surprise, his mouth opening
soundlessly. Soon enough, the outline of his whole body was visible,
duplicating his regular clothes - his standard school uniform - and his
hair. With an unceremonious grunt, Yuugi was dumped on the floor, right
on his rear, body as solid as before.
Bewildered, he
looked up at his Other, sitting on the chair and staring at him,
crimson red eyes boring into large violet, both boys in their own body.
“Mou
hitori no boku!” Yuugi exclaimed, beaming at him.
“Aibou,”
Other Yuugi said, baffled. Anzu laughed softly, amused by both their
bewilderment.
“Master!”
Mana cried out, interrupting their little reunion. She raced to Mahaado
as he seemed to faint from the exertion. Other Yuugi and Anzu quickly
stood up, while Yuugi scrambled to get up from the floor, rushing to
the man’s aid.
“I
told you it would take too much out of you!” Mana scolded
furiously as she quickly tucked herself under Mahaado’s arm,
keeping him from falling over. She grunted as he leaned heavily on her.
“It...it
was worth it,” he said, voice a soft whisper. Mana looked a
little remorseful, pursing her lips.
“I
know,” she answered. “I know, Master.”
“You
have to tell them,” he said. “What we were talking
about…”
“Later,”
Mana answered firmly. “You’re going to rest now,
Master, and then there’s time to talk. This timeline is
intact, we have some leeway now.”
She looked
over at the others, flashing an apologetic smile.
“It’s all right, it’s
just…I’ll explain later. You better sit down
and…get acquainted, or something.”
“For
as long as I am in this timeline, you will remain separated,”
Mahaado said, smiling tiredly at both Yuugi’s. “It
is an honor to offer some of my energy to keep the spell
intact…”
“Master,
that’s enough for now,” Mana reminded him, her
voice fondly yet respectful. She whisked him away by tugging at his
arm, forcing him to walk out of the living room. They could hear her
talking to her Master admonishingly about ‘working too
hard’ and ‘never taking some time for
himself’.
Amazed yet
happy, Anzu turned around to face the two Yuugi’s.
“You
heard it- you two are going to be separated as long as
Mahaado’s here,” she said, clasping her hands. She
addressed Other Yuugi who looked adorable when he was slightly
confused, overjoyed that she finally got to see him without feeling
guilty. Anzu had considered asking Yuugi one of these days, before all
of this happened, to switch with his Other; and even though she knew he
would do that for her, it would make everything…awkward.
She’d fallen in love with his voice, the first time
she’d ever heard him say “Let’s play a
game”. Yuugi would step aside and still smile, but she
didn’t want to hurt him. She would never forgive herself if
she hurt her best friend. Now that they were both separated, this would
make things so much easier. She blushed furiously at the thought.
“Aibou,”
he repeated, voice calm and confident as always, his hands moving over
his arms as if he wanted to check his body was really solid. Yuugi
himself wore a dazzling smile, feeling a little queasy due to the
separation and the magic involved, but was generally happy to see his
Other standing right in front of him.
“This
is so much better than meeting up in our soul rooms,” he said
joyfully. “Now we finally get to see each other in the
flesh.”
“It
is…amazing,” he said, now looking at his hands.
“I…I forgot how it felt…”
“We
have to give you a real name now,” Anzu suggested.
“We can’t go around referring to you as Other Yuugi
all the time! Wait until Jounouchi and Honda hear about this -
they’d love to meet you like this!”
“Well,
ehm…” Yuugi said, feeling a little weighed down by
Anzu’s suggestion. Finding his Other’s name and
memories was their quest together, something they talked about since
the beginning when they were aware of each other’s presence.
It didn’t feel right giving him just a name for the sake of
being able to refer to one another.
“Maybe
Mahaado-san or Mana-chan know his real name,” it suddenly
dawned on him. “They know him as their Pharaoh,
right?”
“I
do not know them, aibou,” his Other answered. “I do
not even know what they are doing here, or why he took the trouble of
separating us.”
“Yami,”
Anzu said.
“What?”
“Yami,”
the girl repeated, smiling. “Why don’t we call you
Yami for now? Yami means ‘dark’, and your eyes are
dark, like Yuugi’s are light. Light and
Dark…” her voice trailed off.
This idea had
just hit her, but now she felt silly for suggesting it. She was met
with two grateful
smiles however, and she blushed again.
“Yami
is a suitable name for as long as this situation is at hand,”
he said, followed by Yuugi.
“That’s
a great idea, Anzu! It’s a suitable name, indeed!”
Yami sat down
again, looking at both Anzu and Yuugi. “This is something
incredibly extraordinary,” he said. “Never have I
thought from the moment that I awoke that I would walk again in a body
of my own.”
“It
must be so hard for you to not remember a thing,” Anzu said
sympathetically. He nodded, leaning back into his chair. Yuugi sat down
next to him, noticing that the biggest difference between them was that
he wasn’t wearing the Puzzle, and Yami was - their separation
hadn’t split the Item as well.
“I
do not know the reason why I was locked away in the Puzzle, or how it
ever came to pass that I owned the Puzzle in the first place. My
earliest memories are of Yuugi, on the floor and in pain, when that
Ushio kid had beaten him.”
“So
far, we’ve learned that you’re a Pharaoh,
that’s for sure,” Yuugi supplied helpfully.
“We all want to help you with this, mou hitori no boku.
You’ll recover your name and your
memories…” And then what?
He quickly killed that train of thought. He owed his Other - no, Yami,
though it was hard to think of him with that name - so much already,
for saving his grandfather’s soul…
“I’m
sorry.”
All three of
them looked up as Mana spoke. Her robes flowed around her as she went
to the other side of the table.
“How’s
Mahaado-san?” Yuugi asked.
“He’s
resting,” she answered. “The spell, the jump here,
it was all too much. After all, his heka
is…depleting, and not what it used to be. I’m
sorry.”
“What
are you sorry for?” Yami asked.
She shook her
head. “That I can’t tell you everything. I know
that you want to ask me questions, I know
what you want to ask… but anything I say or do,
can disrupt the timeline like we said before, and we’ve come
too far to have our work destroy by ourselves.”
“Mana-chan,”
Yuugi said, “will you please tell us what you’re
allowed to tell? We don’t understand. Timelines, heka,
jumps…”
Mana showed a
small smile. “Mahaado is my Master, and I’m his
Apprentice…in magic, what we call heka.
It’s how we called it in Ancient Egypt, and it’s
what we use to jump between several timelines to correct
them.”
“That
sounds…fantastic,” Anzu said. “Ancient
Egypt…”
“I
don’t ask of you to believe me, though it would be nice if
you would,” Mana said without any humor in her voice. She
slumped a little in her chair, tiredness in her features.
“There’s a constant factor in every universe and
every world, to keep the coherence of life and events as they unfold
together - a timeline. All these timelines are a part of the Great
Timeline that spans more than millennia, indefinite, never ending,
never beginning.”
She looked at
the others to gauge their reaction, heaving a soft sigh.
“This Great Timeline absorbs the smaller timelines and
assimilates them as a giant river that keeps on floating, so to speak.
Not all of these timelines are the same as worlds are different and
some events don’t happen as fate or destiny tend to
meddle,” she continued. “It doesn’t
really matter that much to the Great Timeline in its entirety, unless
it’s an event that’s so important that any change
to it alters the course of the timeline and affects the Great Timeline,
throwing it off.”
“I
don’t understand,” Anzu interjected.
“What kinds of events throw off a timeline, how can that even
be possible?”
“Certain
events are determining a world - think of a certain person in a very
powerful position, ruling his country. Or a war could happen, a force
of nature changing a land, or something from the skies, like a
meteorite. It’s not always something you can
control. In your world, dinosaurs are extinct because of a meteorite,
for example. Sure, people are still discussing about it if
that’s really the case, but fact is: dinosaurs
don’t exist anymore. This is one of those pivotal events that
has to happen in every timeline to be assimilated by the Great
Timeline. If there’s a world wherein the meteorite
didn’t have the same impact and dinosaurs would still exist,
assimilation in the Great Timeline would throw it off.”
“I
think I understand,” Yuugi said. “But how are we
involved? I mean, you said something about the Puzzle and releasing the
Pharaoh’s soul…”
Yami looked at
Mana, his eyes examining the girl as if he wanted to catch her in a
lie. What she was telling him went above his imagination, and he
couldn’t shake her familiarity with the Black Magician Girl,
let alone as if he’d knew her even before that.
“Solving
the Puzzle and releasing his soul is one of those
pivotal events as well,” Mana said. “If it
didn’t happen for some reason…” She
paused here, a brief look of sadness in her eyes before she continued,
“…there would be no one able to stand up against
the darkness that’s about to threaten this world as we know
it.”
“Darkness…!”
Anzu repeated, voice soft..
“I’m
sorry again,” Mana said. “But there’s
still a path filled with trials and tests for the both of you. If you
think you had it hard during Duelist Kingdom, you’ll be put
to the test even more with the Battle City Finals that are about to
come. You will have to fight for the God Cards, as those will unlock a
great part of your memories…but only after you managed to
win them, and I’m not allowed to divulge if you do or
not.”
“So
you do know the Duel Monsters game,” Yuugi piped up,
enthusiastic. “Are you the Black Magician Girl? Your
resemblance…”
“I’m
not allowed to divulge that,” Mana whispered.
“You’ll hear that a lot from me or my Master. If we
tell you, we can alter the events of this timeline, and this is the
most complete we’ve found so far.”
Yami briefly
nodded. “Mahaado mentioned something about Kaiba organizing
this tournament, and as I told him, I will participate to win those God
Cards. If there is Darkness to battle, we will win over it.”
Mana rose from
her chair. “I’ve got some work to take care
of,” she said, her eyes resting on Yami before looking at
Anzu and Yuugi. “Feel free to make yourselves at home
here.”
“We
should really call home and tell that we’re staying
here,” Yuugi said after a look at the large clock on the
wall. “I should’ve been home by now!”
“You
can call home, but don’t invite anyone over, not even your
friends,” Mana warned. “It’s for the best
that as few people as possible know about it. If they are aware of
what’s happening, they could inadvertently change the course
of events, thus damaging the timeline.”
“Oh…”
Anzu was clearly disappointed. Jounouchi would probably be worried, as
both she and Yuugi hadn’t shown up at classes today.
“I’ll
be back soon enough, and we can prepare dinner together,”
Mana said, putting her hand on Anzu’s shoulder and gave her a
friendly pat. “I’ll show you how to prepare real
Egyptian Feteer Bel Asaag, that’s a
pastry with meat! We’ll catch up later.”
“All
right,” the girl smiled at the magician, and showed her a
smile again. It was a pity that she couldn’t call Honda or
Jounouchi; they would’ve loved to talk to Yami in person.
“Do
you mind if I use the kitchen to make tea for us all?”
“You
probably have a lot to talk about,” Mana agreed, joyfully.
“Please, go ahead. There’s plenty of tea and
cookies to your tastes available.”
She left the
living room after that, head lowered while a million thoughts went
through her mind. Had she done the right thing, had she told them
enough to understand or too much to harm the timeline after all?
“Mana-chan!
Mana-chan, wait up, please?”
She stopped
dead in her tracks, hearing Yuugi’s voice behind her. Mana
turned around, waiting for him to catch up with her, giving her an
apologetic smile.
“I’m
sorry, this must be terribly rude, Mana-chan…”
“Of
course not, Prince,” she said. “What can I do for
you?”
Yuugi fidgeted
a little. He wanted to tell her once again to please stop calling him
Prince, but it would probably be futile. She was so used to call him
with that particular title, that any attempt of him to make her stop
would probably create an awkward situation.
“Mana-chan,
I was wondering…can I please know…can you please
tell me mou hitori no boku’s true name?
It’s…”
“Something
you’re dying to know,” she finished her sentence.
“I can’t tell you, Prince, please don’t
ask that of me.”
“I’ll
never tell him,” Yuugi pleaded. “I just want to
know what kind of name he has, how his father used to call
him…I can keep it from him…!”
“No,
you can’t,” she said, and her smile was warm and
brilliant instead of admonishing or scolding. “You
don’t have any secrets from each other, Prince and Pharaoh.
I’m sure you’d try to keep it a secret, just as
I’m sure he can get it out of you with looking into your
direction with those eyes of his that make you go weak in your
knees.” Her cheeks turned a dark red as she finished
speaking, and now it was Mana who started fidgeting, plucking at her
dress.
“May
I ask then, where you’re going to?” Yuugi said, his
cheeks coloring as well. Mana had spoken not loudly, but loud and clear
enough to get the meaning behind her words.
“There
are two timelines left at the moment that need our
attention,” Mana answered, willing her blush to go away.
“Two who are so deviated that they’d affect and
harm the Great Timeline greatly…and that’s why we
have to restore them, somehow.”
“It
must be very difficult work,” Yuugi whispered.
“It
is,” she immediately admitted. “There’s
one in Ancient Egypt and one alternate universe… those are
the last two.”
“I’d
love to see Egypt,” Yuugi said. “My grandfather has
been there…he brought back the golden box with the Sennen
Puzzle.”
She nodded.
“Yes, and that was exactly according to the Great
Timeline,” she said. “You finished it in time and
released the Pharaoh’s soul as you were supposed to do. The
timeline in Ancient Egypt…” Her voice became
thick. “Our Pharaoh there…is hard and evil. Things
went wrong in that timeline, and he…he lived through it to
become as hard and malicious as he is now.”
“I…that’s
extremely hard to believe…mou hitori no boku?”
“I
already said too much,” Mana muttered. “Forgive me,
Prince. I have to go now…please join the Pharaoh and Anzu in
the living room. As soon as my Master has rested, he’ll fill
you in on the rest, if he chooses to…”
He knew the
conversation had ended, and he was never the one to pry.
“I’m sorry,” he softly said, but Mana
didn’t hear it as she walked down the hallway, entering
another room and closing the door a little too loud.
Timeline
I, Khemet
Atemu paced
back and forth in his study. The Puzzle dangled, bumping against his
chest angrily with every movement. How could his cousin be so stupid? A
High Priest falling for a pale and white-haired…freak of
nature? It was a conspiracy, he was sure of it. They would go after his
most trusted advisors first, narrowing him down, forcing him into a
corner. With all his Priests charmed, he would be all alone, vulnerable
and defenseless.
That
white-haired demon was just the beginning. Set didn’t feel
anything for her, he was just under her spell. He gritted his teeth.
Though he commanded the Gods, the Pharaoh, the exalted ruler of Khemet,
didn’t have the slightest bit of heka in
his body. Not many knew that, assuming that their monarch was nothing
short of a god himself, disposing over more than enough magic powers to
rival the nation’s greatest spirit sorcerer.
Mahaado.
A faint, queasy feeling welled up inside of him and he put a
hand against his chest, over his heart region. It hurt the most when he
thought of his missing Priest, no, his Priest who ran away from him
soon after the alleged King of Thieves barged into the Palace. It had
taken a God to drive Bakura away, but not after he uttered the threat
that he would go after each and every Priest to get their Sennen Item.
Atemu sat down on one of the many chairs in his room, panting as if he
had ran at least ten miles. Why did it hurt, physically and mentally,
to think of Mahaado? Because he had cared so much for him, because he
wanted to have him, to hold him in his arms, being held by him?
“Great
Pharaoh, are you all right?”
He growled,
having forgotten that Shaadah was with him. Even though Atemu could
demand all the privacy he wanted, in general it happened to be that
there was someone with him almost the entire day, be it one of his
Priests or advisors, or a guard.
“I
am fine,” he snarled, not apologizing for his rude tone. He
would wonder why he was thinking about Mahaado in the first place
later. It had taken another calling of the Gods, Ra Himself in this
case, to kill the thief. By then, Mahaado had left the
Palace…and Atemu had thought, tried to convince himself that
he had gone out to defeat the King of Thieves, to keep his Sennen Ring
out of the man’s clutches…but Mahaado had never
returned, with or without Ring, and the search expeditions Atemu had
send out to find him had always returned empty-handed.
“Great
Pharaoh, about the Syrian delegates…”
“What
is it, did they leave?”
“No,
they didn’t,” Shaadah shook his head.
“They have caught wind of the rumors, and are discussing how
much they can use it to their advantage.”
“I
will not answer to any kind of blackmail,” Atemu huffed.
“Besides, the affairs of my High Priest is none of their
business.”
“They
will more than probably question his credibility in their next
negotiations with you, Great Pharaoh.”
“Just
as I expected, and Set still does not see the problem. A white demon, I
tell you!”
“Great
Pharaoh, Kisara isn’t at fault in this…”
“Is
this your way of telling me that
I am at fault, Priest Shaadah?”
The man
flinched. “Of course not, Great Pharaoh! We’ll find
a solution to this, just as your father always found a
solution…”
“My
father is not here,” Atemu barked. “I rule this
country now, and I will see to it that no demon, white-haired or not,
will tear my Court and my country apart! I have dealt with thieves,
kings, delegates, and this woman will not be the end of my
reign!”
“I’m
sure it won’t come to that,” Shaadah said.
“Please, Great Pharaoh. We have to remain calm in all of
this. If we don’t solve this rightfully, our neighbor
countries…”
“Will
mock us,” Atemu finished his sentence. “It is not
my High Priest’s credibility at stake here, but mine and our
nation’s as well. Women with blue eyes will bring disaster to
this land. I am in charge of this nation - it will not fall at
someone’s hands but mine!”
“Great
Pharaoh,” Shaadah spoke, “we can’t let
ourselves be guided by superstition. The girl is unusual in appearance,
yes, but I’m sure that…”
“Enough
about this woman,” Atemu cut him off. “How is my
vizier?”
The Priest was
taken aback by the question, startled why his Pharaoh would ask about
the elderly vizier right now. Since the man had fallen ill, Atemu had
barely asked about him.
“Shimon’s
health is stable, fortunately. He’s enjoying his time without
any obligations and duties, finally some time for himself.”
Atemu barely
nodded. “He deserves it. He’s been in service of my
family for several generations. I could use his advice on this,
though… but I cannot depend on everyone all the time. I have
to make a decision in this matter.”
“Great
Pharaoh?”
“Keep
an eye on the Syrian delegates,” Atemu said. “I do
not wish for them to send out messengers with news and gossip
about…the recent events. I will talk to Set again and maybe
go visit this Kisara woman myself.”
Shaadah paled,
but quickly bowed his head.
“Do
you think that is wise, Great Pharaoh?”
He snorted.
“After all, I have to see for myself the woman who can make
my esteemed cousin go nuts in love. If he is just as diligent to her as
to his duties, she will probably praise herself lucky that she has
caught herself such a big fish. I will personally see to it that it
will not be the case.”
The Priest
pursed his lips, briefly motioning at the guards, who curtly nodded
with their head before guarding their Pharaoh, accompanying him out of
his room.
“I
will watch him? Watch him die?” The
Priestess’ voice was shrill. She couldn’t believe
her ears. There was someone standing next to her bed, claiming to be
her, showing impressive heka, telling her that she
would watch her Pharaoh die? Both Mana’s cringed, from the
sound of her voice as well as from the idea.
“There’s
no other way,” Mana said. She dropped the sheets and moved
away from the bed. “His darkness…no, the darkness
inside of him will only grow stronger with each passing day, each
passing moment. He has fought so hard…I have to be thankful
it hasn’t gotten that much out of hand
yet…”
“It
hasn’t?” the Priestess barely refrained from
shrieking again. “He’s nowhere near the friend I
grew up with, the boy I knew my whole life! He’s cold,
he’s distant, he uses…”
“Your
body,” Mana said. The Priestess abruptly shut her mouth,
averting her eyes.
“My
body,” she whispered.
“How…what
does it feel like?”
She looked up.
“What? What do you mean?”
Mana was the
one to look away now, her hand fumbling with her cloak. Her hand
trembled slightly. Her heka was depleting fast; she
had had to uphold a masking spell to keep herself disguised from
everyone but the Priestess, and she had made the jump between
timelines.
“I…”
The Priestess
spoke after a minute. “I’ll tell
you…after you tell me first what you’re doing
here, and how and why…he has to die.”
“I
don’t have much time.” Mana looked up again, at the
Priestess, at her spitting image. She had always wondered what would
become of her when she was just a little child, but after seeing so
many worlds, so many realities, Mana knew more than enough. She was
here to restore the Great Timeline, to save worlds from utter
destruction, to bring alternate realities back from beyond control.
“I’m
Mana, I’m you, in each and every way. Undoubtedly
you’ll have many questions…but I can’t
answer them all. Some of the answers go above your belief, beyond your
grasp and imagination.”
“You’re
telling me that, and still you have the nerve to bluntly watch him
die?”
“Mana…”
“You’re
talking to yourself.”
“Priestess?”
The Priestess
felt her cheeks redden. “If you know so much, you also know
that I’m not a real Priestess. I’m only accepted
into the Court by his…by Ate…by the
Pharaoh’s command. To take the place of my
teacher…”
“Mahaado.”
Mana heaved a sigh. She hated this situation, she hated the work she
was doing, she hated this timeline…and she knew how much
Mahaado hated himself. Almost irritated, she rubbed at her eyes and
pinched the bridge of her nose. She had to remain focused.
“How
many of his studies are still behind? How many did you study for
yourself?”
“I
didn’t have always the time,” the Priestess
defended herself. “Besides, if the Pharaoh finds them in my
room…”
“I
was afraid so,” Mana muttered. She hadn’t missed
out on the Priestess’ earlier slip, that she referred to
Atemu with his first name. “Very well. It will suffice to say
that every world, no matter how small, is subjected to a
timeline…and all these timelines are subjected to the Great
Timeline.”
“What
are you talking about?”
Mana shushed
her. “Listen to me, please. In most of the cases, the Great
Timeline is disturbed many times with little pinpricks; events that are
not that important that they throw it off completely. However, there
are certain events that are so drastic, so encompassing, that they
influence the Great Timeline after all.”
“What
kind of events?” The Priestess asked, a little confused. She
didn’t like it that she was listening so meekly, that she was
willing to buy the words this other girl was speaking so easily. There
wasn’t much she couldn’t do about it, though - it
was fascination and curiosity that kept her latched onto the words
spoken.
“Epidemics,
wars, earthquakes…in general, not the kind of happy events.
They change the course of mankind, and that is why they have to appear
in every timeline to keep the Great Timeline going,
otherwise…the balance is thrown off.”
“Where
does…the Pharaoh fit in, then?”
Mana wanted
desperately to sit down, and she didn’t await her
namesake’s approval for it - she flopped down on the nearest
chair, drawing up her knees to her chest.
“He
was supposed to defeat Darkness…”
“He
did!” The Priestess all but crowed. “He defeated
the King of Thieves, who had desecrated his father’s tomb,
and he summoned the golden God to kill him…!”
“That
wasn’t the right course of events,” Mana objected
slowly. She supported her head with her hands. “The King of
Thieves had to be defeated, yes, but not before he had unleashed the
great God of Darkness, Zorc Necrophades.”
“The
great God of Darkness…”
“The
Pharaoh was supposed to die in defeating him, and his sacrifice
would’ve been the key to keep the timeline going as it
was,” Mana all but whispered. “He wasn’t
supposed to live longer, to absorb the Darkness in himself, to become
the man he’s become now.”
“You…you
can’t be serious.”
“I’ve
seen enough worlds and realities by now to know how the Great Timeline
goes…and there’s no place for a corrupted
Pharaoh.”
“It’s
not his fault!” the Priestess cried.
“It’s not his fault! If Maha…Master
didn’t run away, he could’ve helped him, together,
in defeating that Darkness!”
“No!”
Mana shifted in the chair, fixing the Priestess a stern glare.
“Mahaado…couldn’t have been of any use.
There was nothing in his powers that could’ve avoided all of
this.”
“You’re
lying…you’re just some clever witch
who’s telling lies to cause unrest…!”
“I’m
not lying. I’m not asking you to believe me, anyway.
I’m asking you to help me, for I can’t do this
alone.”
“If
you want any help of me in killing him, you can forget it. Leave here,
right now, before I call the guards and have you taken to the
dungeons.”
Mana let out a
dry laugh, a short chuckle. “You’ll change your
mind, Priestess. You will, soon enough…and pray that it
won’t be too late by then.”
She had barely
finished her sentence or her heka was depleted.
Unable to keep her presence anchored in this world, Mana let it go, let
herself go, allowing herself to be pulled back into the timeline that
was at least the less damaged one. She left the Priestess behind in
confusion and in tears, forcefully biting back her own.
The guards had
to quicken their pace to keep up with their Pharaoh; despite being
small, Atemu kept a very fast stride. He had left his own room, walking
down the large hallways and crossing one of the most beautiful lotus
gardens known to mankind - though he didn’t look at it once -
towards the servants’ quarters.
“Great Pharaoh,” one of the guards finally spoke up, “are you sure you want to be here?”
Atemu looked
over his shoulder, narrowing his crimson red eyes. The taller man
gulped, but he stuck to his guns. “Great Pharaoh?”
“Bring
me to that woman,” he spoke. “I wish to speak to
this Kisara myself. I ordered her to be brought to the
servants’ quarters. Where is she?”
The guards
exchanged nervous glances.
“Ah…we…we’re not really sure
where she is, Great Pharaoh.”
Atemu turned
around, the movement so fast, his cloak swirled around. “What
do you mean by that? Go get me someone who does
know where this woman is!”
“Great
Pharaoh…”
“What?”
“Great
Pharaoh, we don’t know someone who
knows…”
“We
only know she isn’t here,” the other guard said,
almost pleading. “The High Priest, Great Pharaoh, he wanted
to make sure she was safe and sound, without too many people
knowing…”
“You
idiots,” Atemu snarled. “I will have your heads for
this!”
Brusquely, he
went past them and pushed them out of his way, the two guards looking
horrified. They were supposed to guard him, watch his every step and
keep him safe, but after his last words… nervously, they
remained standing, considering whether to run if someone had heard his
words, or to go after him and pretend nothing had happened.
Atemu
couldn’t care less, the guards already disappearing from his
mind, anger running through his veins. Set had deliberately ignored his
orders and kept the woman hidden now, hadn’t he? What was he
thinking, did he single-handedly want to ruin the nation? He growled in
annoyance when he realized that he didn’t know where
Set’s quarters were. Another pair of guards came to help him,
guiding him to the right hallway, up a few stairs until they reached
the right wing of the Palace, housing all the Priests and their
personal staff.
Atemu
didn’t wait for the guards to knock on the door, but already
went through it, throwing it open as he entered. Sure enough, his High
Priest was sitting at his writing table, startled at his sudden
entrance. The young woman, Kisara, was lying on a sofa, comfortably
supported by a healthy amount of cushions, covered with a thin blanket.
“What
is the meaning of this?” Atemu said out loud, ignoring the
furious look on his cousin’s face. “Why are you
ignoring my orders?”
“I
told you that I would take full responsibility for Kisara,”
Set said, visibly suppressing his irritation.
“Great
Pharaoh, it was my own judgment that she was not safe in the
servant’s quarters. I wished her close, so I could keep an
eye on her.”
“Do
not hold me for stupid,” Atemu said, the same annoyance in
his tone of voice. He tilted his head, looking at Kisara whose wide,
blue eyes were…strangely hypnotizing. Forcefully, he averted
his head, noticing the Sennen Rod lying on Set’s desk.
“Great
Pharaoh…”
“I
will not have her cause this much riot between you and me,”
Atemu continued. “You are my most trusted and wisest advisor.
I need you at my Court, head straight and mind clear of any foolish,
corrupted thought.”
Set lowered
his eyes, briefly. “I thank you for your faith in
me,” he said, “but my head is
straight and my mind is clear. I am not doing
anything different than I would usually do. I have taken care of the
problem, or what is thought of as a problem.”
“You
ignored my orders.”
“Great
Pharaoh, it would have caused more of a ruckus if we were to house her
in the servants’ quarters. She would be badly treated, and
she needs rest, to find her strength again.” The High Priest
kept his eyes on Atemu, carefully watching where he was going. Atemu
moved towards the large desk, picking up one of the papers.
“At
least you are still working.”
“But
of course, Great Pharaoh.”
Set’s
attention on Atemu was briefly interrupted as he heard a rustling
sound, of fabric being pushed away; Kisara tried to get up. The High
Priest moved to help her, softly whispering to her to stay down and
save her strength.
“These
are the latest reports about the national guard?”
“Yes,”
Set answered, slightly distracted as he supported the girl.
“I have just received final reports from the
captains.”
“Very
well. I want you to keep me informed about the mobility and strength of
our army.”
“Great
Pharaoh?” Set turned around, confused. As far as he knew,
there wasn’t a war going on. It was of course his duty to
keep the Pharaoh informed about the state of his army, but he had never
asked so specifically about it before. Kisara tugged at his collar.
“It’s
all right. I can stand.”
Atemu turned
away from the desk, hearing her speak for the very first time.
“I
did not know that you mastered our language.”
“Exalted
Pharaoh,” she said, her voice soft, but melodious, the title
obviously strange to her. “I know the language.”
“Kisara
is native to our nation,” Set supplied. “She is not
from another country…”
The girl shook
her head. “I’m a proud denizen of Khemet.”
“How
come you look so different?” Atemu demanded. He moved his
arms, his right arm in particular, from resting against his back to his
front. Set raised an eyebrow when he saw the Pharaoh with his Sennen
Item - the Rod. He’d left it on his desk as he’d
been working on the reports; he didn’t know why Atemu wanted
to hold it right now. He already had an Item, the heavy Puzzle.
“I
don’t know,” Kisara answered and tried to bow, but
the movement was too straining on her weak constitution and she swayed.
Set quickly stabilized her, wrapping an arm around her to keep her
upright. Stubbornly, she pushed his arm away from her as soon as she
found her balance. She gave him a grateful smile, then she turned
towards Atemu again, lowering her head a little.
“Great
Pharaoh, I don’t know about my parents. I have lived on my
own for as long as I can remember. I want to thank you for your great
hospitality and that I’m allowed to live here. I have always
been on the run, out of fear, away from the hatred and pain.”
“They
say that if you look in your blue eyes, you will be cursed,”
Atemu casually said. “Is that true, Kisara?”
She looked a
little dumbfounded. “There are many prejudices going around,
mighty Pharaoh. I am sure that you, in the wisdom bestowed upon you,
realize that many of these prejudices are false.”
“Children’s
fantasies and fairy tales,” Set added. “Kisara has
been through enough. As soon as she has rested more, she will be more
than happy to answer any of your questions.”
Atemu held the
Sennen Rod in his right hand, his left hand closing itself around the
handle.
“How
long will that take?”
“For
her to rest?” Set asked. “As long as it takes,
Great Pharaoh. She almost died from dehydration, she…what is
that noise?”
“Pharaoh…!
Pharaoh!”
It was another
female voice, and both Set and Kisara took a step back, shifting
towards each other.
“Mana?
What are you doing here?”
The Priestess
all but ran towards them, her eyes frantically glued to Atemu,
examining him.
“What
is the meaning of this, Mana?” he asked, his hands still
holding the Sennen Rod. Mana blushed, knowing that she’d been
very rash in her actions. After her encounter with the other, strange
Mana, the girl that claimed to be her and was
her, and all her talk about the timelines, the Priestess wanted to see
for herself that at least her Pharaoh was safe…and now she
was standing in Set’s quarters, Atemu obviously alive,
interrupting the discussion. She couldn’t back out with an
excuse now.
“I…I
have to talk to you, urgently,” she said, bowing to him.
“In priv…in private. Please.”
“All
in due time,” Atemu said. “I have to deal with
another urgent matter first.”
“I
cannot believe that you still think this is a matter at all,”
Set growled, fairly irritably. His sharp eyes were focused on Atemu,
failing to have heard the sound of the dagger concealed in the Sennen
Rod being unscrewed due to all the previous noise.
“It is
an important matter. You have forsaken my orders, you have
shown that you are willing to take risks and endanger our nation by
bringing this woman to your personal quarters…”
“Please,
Great Pharaoh,” Kisara tried to raise her voice.
“If…if it’s such a problem, I better be
going…I don’t want to be of any burden.”
“You
are not a burden.” Set firmly spoke up,
not about to give in. “As far as I am concerned, this
discussion has ended. There is nothing more we can say about this, and
frankly, I…”
“Silence!”
Atemu had stepped closer, drawing up all his height as he stood in
front of Set and Kisara. “I will not have you plunge us into
a crisis just because you fancy a white demon.”
“Stop
that,” Set hissed. “Do not refer to her like
that…”
“Pharaoh,”
Kisara started to talk at the same moment, “I can assure you,
I will never…”
“Atemu,”
Mana wanted to say, but her voice was frozen. Frozen in time, frozen in
fear, frozen in that one second of realization settling in, of despair
being born, of shells being removed from the eyes. She wasn’t
believing what she was seeing, denying it in every fiber of her soul,
every corner of her heart, but she saw it happening - the dagger being
lifted, the expression on Kisara’s face changing from
pleading to disbelieving pain, Set’s soundless cry.
The girl fell
to the floor, hands pressing against her abdomen, blood gushing through
her fingers, staining her pale skin, coloring her dress. Weakened and
fragile as she was, Kisara all but died at the moment she fell on the
floor, the impact when hitting the tiles too much for her body to
handle. Set immediately kneeled next to her, taking her in his arms,
repeating her name.
“Kisara!
Kisara!”
Plain disgust
was written all over Mana’s face as she looked at Atemu, who
calmly screwed the end cap on the Sennen Rod again, concealing the
dagger once more. She didn’t see if there was any blood on
the object, but even if there was, it wasn’t of any
importance. He had killed her, in cold blood, not showing the faintest
bit of remorse or sorrow…
“How
could you!” she cried out. Certain events that influence the
Great Timeline. “You killed her!” The
Pharaoh was supposed to die in defeating him, and his sacrifice
would’ve been the key to keep the timeline going as it was.
“You
killed her!” He wasn’t supposed to live
longer, to absorb the Darkness in himself, to become the man
he’s become now. She had been lying. To herself, to
everyone around herself, to all the Gods watching over her, to her
heart, her mind, her body and soul. I’ve seen
enough worlds and realities by now to know how the Great Timeline
goes…and there’s no place for a corrupted Pharaoh.
There was no
one to help her now but herself - as far as she could muster up the
strength to walk a new path, not this path of imminent destruction. Her
voice kept repeating the words, each with increasing disbelief and
horror. She wasn’t looking at Kisara on the floor, she
wasn’t looking at Set who was shaking at her as if he could
bring her back to life. I’m asking you to help me,
for I can’t do this alone. No remorse. No guilt.
His face was blank, bored maybe, and the Sennen Rod was still in his
hand, his fingers simply curled around it. So much gold adorned his tan
body, so small in statue and so tall in what he used to believe in -
justice, fairness, equal chances.
He
wasn’t a Pharaoh. He was nothing but a monster. You’ll
change your mind, Priestess. You will, soon enough…and pray
that it won’t be too late by then. She cried out
something unintelligible and turned around, running away from him as
fast as she could. Set was calling for her, pleading for her to stay
and to try to heal Kisara, even though he already knew it was in vain.
She kept
yelling “No, no, no!” as she ran through the
hallways, haunted by ghosts, haunted by her defeat, haunted by herself.
Timeline
II, Alternate Universe: Domino City, Japan
The quaint
Kame Game Shop owned by Mutou Sugoroku was well-known all over town;
the man had established a name in trading in the most exotic and
wonderful games, both international and national. He was also rumored
to own an exclusive, very interesting collection of ancient and rare
games from all over the world, and excelling in every one of them. His
grandson, Mutou Yuugi, who had inherited his knack for gaming, had gone
to Domino High until he dropped out.
Jounouchi
suppressed the queasy feeling in his stomach as they approached the
store, sticking out like a sore thumb between the surrounding gray
apartment buildings because of its striking green and red colors. The
store was combined with the house where the Mutous lived and was topped
off with a roof that would fit a surrealistic painting. Whoever was
responsible for the architecture had either been a genius or just plain
drunk.
“We’re
here,” he announced superfluously as he opened the front
door, a bell chiming happily. It was small, the walls covered
with posters announcing game tournaments or sales, display cases on the
left and right, large bookcases filled to the brim with board games.
The little room left was occupied by a giant counter, stacked with even
more games and a large, old-fashioned cash register.
There was no
one behind the counter and Jounouchi walked forward, followed by the
others - Honda, looking around like a kid in a candy store, and Mana
and Mahaado sternly and silently taking in the surroundings. Jounouchi
had never been in the store before, and was quite impressed by the
amount of card games. He’d been lucky with blackjack and
poker before, learning the rules while he was with the gang - he
didn’t know much about the trading card games,
though…he didn’t have any money to spend on them
anyway.
“Welcome!”
It was obviously an elderly man who spoke, and Mutou Sugoroku entered
the store from a door to the right; the bell had been loud enough to
hear through the entire house.
“What
can I do for you?”
“We’re
here to see Yuugi,” Jounouchi said, showing a goofy grin.
Even though the family resemblance was quite obvious - the hair, the
eyes and the height - the man didn’t show any lack of
confidence or self-esteem as his grandson had.
“Are
you?” he asked, his voice chilly. “He
didn’t tell me he was expecting visitors.” His eyes
went over Jounouchi’s and Honda’s school uniforms.
“And certainly not visitors from his school. Jounouchi
Katsuya, right?”
“The
one and only,” he grinned.
“Give
me one reason why I shouldn’t throw you out,”
Sugoroko growled. “It was because of you that he left school.
Do you have any idea what you’ve done to him?”
“The
kid doesn’t have any character,” Jounouchi snorted
before anyone else could say something. “Gramps,
don’t take it so hard. He wouldn’t have stood a
chance in the business world either, with his whining and
yammering.”
“Enough,”
Mahaado cut in. “We are here to see the Prince, not to trade
insults.”
“The
Prince?” Sugoroku repeated.
“Yeah,
these…people seem to think Yuugi is some kind of
Prince,” Jounouchi snorted again, making a dismissive gesture
with his hand. Sugoroku folded his hands on the counter, looking from
one to another.
“What
is the meaning of this? If this is some kind of
prank…”
“Sir,
please,” Mahaado said, “we would really like to see
our Prince.”
Suddenly, the
elder man nodded. “Very well. Yuugi is in the storage room,
helping me keeping the stock up-to-date. I will leave you with him, but
the moment he wants you to leave, you will leave. Understood?”
It was more
aimed towards Jounouchi and Honda than to the others, but Mahaado
nodded in return.
“Storage
room is on the left, immediately after you’ve gone through
that door,” Sugoroku pointed them towards the door on the
right. Mana thanked the man in passing, and went after Mahaado.
Jounouchi and Honda followed her, both muttering something under their
breath.
The storage
room was quite large, and chilly - the few wooden scaffoldings, crammed
with cardboard boxes, made it difficult to see.
“Hey,
Yuugi!” Jounouchi hollered, ignoring Mahaado’s
angry look.
There was no
answer, so Jounouchi repeated his words, joined by Honda.
“Hey,
Yuugi! Are you here?”
Mahaado
suddenly widened his eyes and Jounouchi showed his trademark grin. A
familiar head peaked from behind the last scaffolding, large eyes even
wider than he remembered.
“Jounouchi-kun…Honda-kun!
What are you doing here?”
“We’ve
come to visit you,” Honda said casually, enjoying how the
small boy swallowed. Yuugi held a small box in his hands, but it
wasn’t his golden treasure box; it was just a package of Duel
Monsters booster packs. Jounouchi had heard a lot about the game, and
was surprised to learn that there were even tournaments with great
prizes. How anyone could ever get rich by winning game tournaments was
a riddle to him, but apparently is was a booming market.
“It’s
nice of you to visit me,” the small boy said, trying to hide
the disbelief that two of his greatest bullies had actually come to
visit him.
“What’s
that you have in your hand?” Honda asked.
“This?
Oh, this is a carton of Duel Monsters booster packs, I was just
checking up on the inventory,” Yuugi said hurriedly. He
stepped back when Honda reached for the box, but he wasn’t
fast enough and he grabbed one of the booster packs.
“Duel
Monsters, huh? Do you play the game yourself?”
“We
are not here for small talk,” Mahaado reminded them. Mana
stood next to him, looking at Yuugi with a rather neutral look on her
face, though her lips were still curled up in a smile.
“Honda-kun,
please don’t open it, those costs money,” Yuugi
protested. Honda waved with the package in his face.
“What
if I don’t have any money to pay for it?”
“Honda-kun…!”
“Enough.”
Mahaado stepped forward and took the package from Honda to give it back
to Yuugi. Jounouchi snickered. So little Yuugi had barely changed after
all. He was dressed in simple slacks and a shirt, wearing a gray vest
over it. He was exactly as Jounouchi had seen him the last time, even
his typical tri-colored hair was still the same.
“How
come you’re visiting me, Jounouchi-kun? And who are your
friends?” Yuugi asked, putting the box on the small table
behind him covered with paperwork.
Jounouchi
heaved a sigh. Only Yuugi would immediately assume that everyone around
him was his friend.
“They
wanted to see you and didn’t know where to reach
you,” he said, bored. “It’s about your
puzzle.”
Yuugi frowned.
“What about it?”
“Prince,”
Mahaado bowed to him. “May I ask you where the Item
is?”
“Prince?
Item?”
“The
Puzzle,” Mana spoke up. “Do you still have
it?”
“I
do, but it’s incomplete,” Yuugi answered. A
stubborn look appeared on his face. “I’m not
selling it, if that’s what you want.”
The girl
smiled a little sadly. “No, it’s yours, Prince. We
would like to see it, please.”
“Why
are you calling me Prince?” Yuugi tilted his head.
“Haven’t we met before? You look
familiar.”
“We
haven’t met before, but it’s not surprising that I
look familiar to you,” she said. “All in due time,
Prince.”
Jounouchi
whistled, amused. “I didn’t know you picked up hot
chicks, Yuugi!” He immediately doubled over, gasping as he
was punched in the stomach - while no one moved.
Yuugi looked
confused, Honda jumped up ready for action, and Mahaado growled.
“You
will not refer to my Apprentice that way!” He turned towards
Yuugi again. “Prince, the Puzzle, if you please.”
“It’s
upstairs,” Yuugi answered, eyeing Jounouchi who tried to
regain his breathing, meanwhile uttering curses.
“I…I’ll go get it for you.”
As he walked
away, Jounouchi yelled at Mahaado. “Where the fuck was that
for!”
“I
told you, I will not have you refer to my Apprentice that
way,” Mahaado answered calmly.
“It
is sad to see how you turned out to be, Jounouchi Katsuya. I had hoped
that this world was deviated from its course of anything else but you.
You have always proven to be strong and faithful to your friends, and
to see you as an ill-mannered, brusque cad is something I was never
expecting to see.”
“Hey,
who are you calling a cad, you quack,” Honda protested.
“I
advise you to shut up,” Mahaado rudely told him.
“You have both condemned this world to its demise, and pray
to your Gods that something can be saved before the darkness
strikes.”
“Yeah,
well, whatever,” Jounouchi huffed. “We’ve
brought you here like good little lackeys, and you’ve found
your precious Prince. Let’s get the hell out of here,
Honda.”
“You
are not permitted to go anywhere.”
“Excuse
me?”
“You
are not permitted to go anywhere.”
“Take
a hike, you moron!”
“Do
not make me freeze you on the spot and deny you your ability to
speak,” Mahaado said. “I do not have any qualms
about keeping you in place here with every means necessary.”
“What
do you want from us?” Honda demanded. “For all your
talk about the end of the world and doom, you haven’t
explained anything, and still you’re holding us responsible
for everything that has happened? You’re way out of whack,
man.”
“What
is this all about? Could you please stop fighting?” Yuugi had
entered the storage room again, carrying something triangular in his
hands. “I could hear you all from upstairs.”
“Yeah
well, tall and lanky doesn’t want to let us go,”
Jounouchi growled.
“Is
that the Item?” Mahaado ignored him, focused intently on
Yuugi’s hands. The small boy put it on the table so everyone
could see.
“Yes,
this is the Puzzle I got from my grandfather. He found it in Egypt, you
know…but it’s not complete,
unfortunately.”
He moved his
hands away and both Mahaado and Mana uttered a shocked gasp. The Puzzle
was lying in front of them, perfectly in once piece…except
for the missing center piece.
“You
never finished it, Prince…” he said.
Yuugi blushed
faintly, not used to being addressed like that, feeling embarrassed.
“I don’t know how it’s
possible…either it was incomplete when my grandfather
brought it back from Egypt, or I’ve been careless.
I’ve taken it a few times to school with me, maybe one of the
pieces…”
“…was
taken away by someone who thought it was an awesome
joke,” Mahaado completed his sentence, staring pointedly at
Jounouchi.
“I
must’ve dropped it somewhere,” Yuugi said.
“No one touched the box, I was the only one to carry
it…”
“Your
kindness is great, Prince,” Mana said, her voice cheerful.
“You always want to see the good side of everything and
everyone, even if it’s not true. You didn’t lose
the piece, it…”
“If
you want some kind of confession from me, yes, I took that stupid piece
and threw it out of the window,” Jounouchi snarled.
“Can we cut it out with the mystery thing and the stupid
Prince stuff, and tell us all in little words what the fuck is going
on?”
Even Honda
looked up from his friend’s outburst, and Yuugi blushed
deeper, not used to the language.
“Maybe
it’s better if we all go to the living room
and…talk,” he suggested. “I
don’t even know your names, eh…?”
“Mahaado,”
he said curtly. “Mahaado and Mana.”
“Mahaado
and Mana,” Yuugi repeated. “Let’s go to
the living room.
Honda-kun…Jounouchi-kun…?”
“Yeah yeah, we’re coming.”
The golden
Puzzle rested on the coffee table, the missing piece a large black hole
on the front. Mahaado kept looking at it, a disturbed expression on his
face. Mana had gone quiet, her hands plucking at the folds in the
fabric of her formless robes covering up her entire body.
“It
is as I feared.”
Yuugi stared
at the tall man, slightly uncomfortable. He had never known that
Jounouchi had taken a piece of the Puzzle out of the box and thrown it
into the school’s swimming pool; he had simply assumed that
he was responsible himself for missing the last piece.
“What
now, Master?” Mana asked.
“How
bad can it be?” Honda asked at the same time. He
didn’t see the importance of the gaudy piece of jewelry,
thinking everyone made a lot of fuss about nothing.
“How
bad it can be?” Mahaado fixed his gaze on him. “The
end of the world, that is how bad it can be. Prince was supposed to
solve the Puzzle and inherit the Pharaoh’s soul.
“Together,
they would save the world from everlasting darkness. Now that the
Puzzle has not been solved, the Pharaoh’s soul has not been
released, which means Prince is alone…and the half of one
soul cannot do the work of a complete soul.”
“Gibberish.
Just fucking gibberish,” Jounouch muttered.
“Silence!”
Mahaado snapped. “You have no room to talk, as it was you
who caused all of this!”
“How
the hell was I supposed to know? All I saw was a whiny kid prancing
around with his golden treasure box!”
“Stop
fighting, please!” Yuugi raised his voice, trying to drown
the others out. Jounouchi cringed.
“At
least nothing about your voice changed. Sheeesh!”
“Enough
of this,” Mahaado said. “If the Puzzle cannot be
completed, this world is doomed and we are wasting our time
here.”
“How
can we complete it, then?”
Yuugi frowned.
“If Jounouchi-kun threw it in the swimming pool,
I’d say it would still be there on the
bottom…”
“I
don’t think so,” Honda shook his head.
“It’s been months, and the pool has been cleaned in
the meantime.”
“The
front piece is quite big,” Yuugi pointed at the Puzzle.
“Certainly, when cleaning the pool, they would’ve
noticed it?”
“It’s
too big to slip through a filter,” Honda added, vaguely
wondering why he was even actively contributing to the conversation.
The whole thing seemed weirder by the second.
“I
can call the school tomorrow and ask about it,” Yuugi
suggested. “If anyone would’ve seen it,
it’s Hashimono, the janitor.”
“Very
well, Prince,” Mahaado said, obviously content. Mana showed a
brilliant smile.
“See?
I told you that Prince would find a solution!”
“Could
you please refer to me as Yuugi…please?” Yuugi
said, blushing furiously. Both shook their heads, wearing similar
all-knowing smiles. The small boy wished his blush would go away,
feeling rather sheepish in the company of his visitors.
“Fine,
Yuugi here calls to the school tomorrow, everything’s fine
and dandy, world saved,” Jounouchi said. He turned around
with the intention to leave, even motioning to his friend.
“Not
exactly,” Mahaado spoke up, his voice commanding enough to
make Jounouchi halt in mid-movement. “You still have a role
to play, as you are responsible for this mess to begin with.”
“I’d
like to ask of you to repeat that a little more often,”
Jounouchi answered in a bored tone. “I really do think you
haven’t stressed it enough.”
“I’m
sure Jounouchi-kun didn’t mean it,” Yuugi said,
smiling. “After all, he was trying to teach me to become a
man.”
Mahaado looked
at him for a brief moment, then averted his head and stood up, rather
brusquely.
“We
have to leave now, but we will return soon enough. There is still time,
ironically enough.”
“Where
are you going to?” Yuugi wanted to know. “We have a
guestroom…if you don’t have a place to
stay…”
“Thank
you, Prince, you are too kind,” Mahaado thanked him.
“We return to another world as that is the basic timeline as
we know it, for now…a pure world which we use as a standard
to restore the Great Timeline.”
“Oh…okay,”
Yuugi replied, slightly dumbfounded. He stood up as well, throwing a
last look on the incomplete Puzzle and walked with his visitors to the
front door; one floor down as the living quarters were above the Game
Shop. Jounouchi and Honda followed, making rude gestures at each other
to indicate what they were thinking of Mahaado’s words.
When Mahaado
and Mana were out of sight, Yuugi was very surprised to see Jounouchi
and Honda still standing in the hallway. Wearily, he turned towards
them, holding the door open.
“Hey,
Yuugi…”
He
automatically cringed, expecting a snide remark from the both of them.
“Y- yes?”
“Did
you listen to the news today? About the escaped convict?”
“I…I
did,” Yuugi said, wondering why Jounouchi brought up that
topic. “He’s still at large, and everyone is
advised to go straight to home after work or school and to be extra
careful.”
“He
killed one of his hostages yesterday,” Jounouchi continued.
“Did you know…that it was Anzu?”
Yuugi’s
eyes went even wider. “Wh-what? Anzu? That’s not
possible…”
“I’m
sorry,” Jounouchi said, and Honda nodded with him. Neither
one of them had wished the girl dead. “I don’t
think it means much to you, but I’m sorry. I thought you
should know it.”
“Th-thank
you,” Yuugi croaked. Anzu had always been there for him, his
friend since elementary school…and now she was dead? He
spoke to her two days ago, on the phone, catching up…two
days ago.
“We’ve
got to go,” Jounouchi said abruptly and brushed past Yuugi,
all but pushing him out of the way. Honda followed suit, leaving the
smaller boy with his sudden grief behind, thoughts already on other
things instead of his former classmate.
“Uwaaah…”
Jounouchi stared at himself in the mirror, toothbrush sticking out of
his mouth, raking his hands through his already mussed hair. It was a
Friday, which was always good - Friday held the least classes, and it
was the start of the weekend. Today was even a more special Friday, as
his sister would come over and spend the weekend with him!
Usually
Shizuka went with her mother, but she had to work the upcoming weekend
and since his father was gone for the next few days…Shizuka
made her mother believe that she was spending the days with a friend -
said friend was involved in the ‘conspiracy’ and
knew how important it was for Shizuka to spend some time with her
brother - and would wait for Jounouchi to come pick her up from the
institute.
His mind was
pretty empty as usual. Negative thoughts never stayed long with
Jounouchi as he simply didn’t care for a lot of things, or
simply refused to spend any energy on it. He still felt bad about
Anzu’s death even though it wasn’t his
responsibility, and the whole issue with Yuugi, the Puzzle and Mahaado
and Mana barely took any of his thoughts. So what if one piece of a
stupid puzzle was missing? End of the world, he didn’t
believe in that kind of crap.
If Yuugi
wanted to believe all that, more power to him, but Jounouchi Katsuya
had other things to worry about. Like his paper route, getting past his
dad without the man noticing him… his hand moved to the
right and turned on the small bathroom radio. It was barely giving off
any sound; the batteries had to be replaced. Jounouchi chewed on his
toothbrush, muttering something, listening half-heartedly to the news
as he searched for a comb.
“Domino
City prefecture is still in the dark about the death of American CEO
Pegasus J. Crawford, who was found lifeless in his hotel room yesterday
morning. Crawford, rumored to be in Domino for the organization of an
international Duel Monsters tournament, bled to death as his left eye
was brutally torn from its socket. According to…”
“Bah,”
Jounouchi gurgled, toothbrush still clenched between his teeth, as he
switched off the radio. What was it with all these deaths lately?
Domino City was large, but not as large as Tokyo, and crime was
typically limited to a robbery or petty theft. Jounouchi grumbled at
his reflection and rinsed his mouth, combing his hair at the same time.
He met up with
Honda on his way to school, catching up with some members of the
Hirutani gang as well. They talked about how they had great fun in
spooking people when impersonating the escaped convict, who still was
at large. Jounouchi scowled, but let it slide; he wasn’t the
gang leader and frankly, he couldn’t care less about the
airheads.
School was
uneventful, even though Bakura was late for the first time. Jounouchi
was amused at how the polite boy tried to search for excuses as the
teacher scolded him for being late. Finally, the boy was allowed to
sit, muttering something about anal retentive teachers and their
unhealthy obsession with the clock.
“What
was that, Bakura?” Jounouchi asked pleasantly.
“Nothing!”
“Man,
you look like shit,” Honda said, subtle as ever.
“What did you do? Party until you dropped?”
“I
couldn’t drag myself out of bed this morning,”
Bakura complained, rubbing at his face. His bleary eyes looked red and
irritated, and he was as pale as ever.
“Hey,
shut up,” another student hissed at them. This teacher was
notorious for his lectures about behavior in class, and used every
disturbance as an opportunity to launch in one of those lectures about
respect for authority and the good values and morals of the previous
generation. Jounouchi muttered a few curse words and was about to say
more when the teacher looked his way, but remembered at the last moment
that the teacher could send him away for detention…which
would seriously clash with his afternoon class, so he shut up.
At lunchtime,
Honda inquired if Jounouchi had heard something from Yuugi about the
missing Puzzle piece.
“Huh,
no, why?” Jounouchi scoured his pockets for money. He wanted
to buy a sandwich as he was really hungry, and Honda biting into a very
delicious looking one didn’t help much.
“Hey
man, do you have a few yen left?”
“Lemme
see…well, about that guy? Or about his precious
Puzzle?”
“I
don’t even think he has my telephone number,”
Jounouchi said, shrugging. “I don’t think
it’s as important as that Mahaado fellow made it out to be.
How can the fate of the world depend on one piece of one stupid golden
Puzzle?”
“Yeah,
you’re right. Hey, what are you going to do this
afternoon?”
Jounouchi
showed a happy grin. “Going to pick up my sister;
she’s spending this weekend with me!”
“Wow,”
Honda said. “That certainly changes my plans. I’ve
to baby sit my nephew this afternoon, mind if I come over? Maybe
Shizuka-chan would like to hold him…”
“No
fucking way,” Jounouchi growled at him. “Leave that
smelly kid at home!”
“But
Jounouchi…!”
“By
the way, my sister is practically engaged.”
“What?”
“Hey,
stop shouting! Yeah, Otogi asked her to be his girl, and she said
yes.”
“Otogi?
As in Otogi Ryuuji, the owner of the Black Crown?”
“One
and the same…”
Honda balled
his fists. “Shizuka-chan is clearly brainwashed by that guy!
He’d never care about a girl like her! It’s
probably one of his plans to make himself look good in the public
eye!”
“He’s
rich,” Jounouchi said as if that was the most important
thing. “He can pay for Shizuka’s care better than I
at the moment.”
Honda muttered
something inaudible. “Otogi… I can’t
believe it…” He dug deeper in his pants pockets,
finding a few crumpled bills. “Here you are.”
“Thanks,
man.” Jounouchi bought himself the sandwich and greedily tore
off the wrapper.
There was only
one hour of school left after lunch, and if he hurried, he could catch
an early bus to Schizuka’s school. The sooner he got to see
his sister, the better.
Leaving Honda
heartbroken after the news about his sister, Jounouchi rode the bus to
the institute where he’d pick her up. Heh, he
couldn’t imagine Honda’s troubles with girls - Miho
had rejected him, and now he apparently had a crush on Shizuka.
Jounouchi hadn’t laughed at his friend when Miho refused to
go out with him, but he didn’t see the necessity of dating
girls yet.
He was too
busy with his job, his school and his situation at home, not to mention
everything involving Shizuka. Her future was more important; the girls
would follow later. He grinned to himself, though his good mood
dwindled rapidly when he noticed Shizuka at the gates of the institute
with someone next to her. What the hell is he doing here?
“Shizuka!”
“Onii-chan!”
She flailed with her arms in his direction, and he quickly embraced
her, hugging her close. It hadn’t escaped him that
she’d been holding hands with Otogi before he called out her
name, and he shot him an irritated look.
Domino
City’s well-renowned playboy showed him a perfect smile and
even a thumbs-up sign. He’d shared a few classes with
Jounouchi before dropping out and resuming his education with private
tutoring, as he’d been too busy with his store and game
designing to follow the regular school program. Jounouchi disliked him;
he knew enough of the guy to not see him as the perfect boyfriend for
Shizuka.
“So, where’s your fan club?” he snarled
at the other.
“Onii-chan!”
Shizuka sputtered, shocked.
Otogi raked a
hand through his dark hair, twirling a lock around his finger.
“I’ve given up all the girls and fame to be with
your sister, Jounouchi. Shizuka’s the best thing
that’s happened to me in all my life, and who cares for some
dumb fan girls when they’ve found true love?”
“True
love?” Jounouchi parroted. “Don’t make me
laugh. You’re not the type to be swooned by even the concept
of true love.”
“Onii-chan,
don’t fight,” Shizuka pleaded. “Ryuuji
took the day off especially for us…!”
“He
did, huh? That’s very kind of him, but
unnecessary,” Jounouchi answered rudely. “Come on,
Shizuka, we’re going home.”
“Not
so fast, Jounouchi,” Otogi interrupted. “I promised
Shizuka to take her to the park, and you’re…more
than welcome to come with us. We can have dinner together in the
evening?”
He was about
to say something scathing when he caught Shizuka’s hopeful
and enthusiastic look on her face. Jounouchi wanted to protest, but it
melted away as she smiled at him, nudging him a little at his elbow.
“Oh,
all right,” he grumpily agreed. Shizuka clasped her hands and
chirped with joy. He could stomach Otogi’s presence for her
and for her only.
“Let’s
go, then!” Otogi suggested. “We would’ve
called you about our plans, Jounouchi, but since you don’t
have a cell phone…”
“Too
bad, I presume,” he bit back, having already noticed that the
other was wearing designer clothes. His paper job barely enabled him to
pay for his tuition and the occasional sandwich. Otogi chuckled and
possessively took Shizuka’s hand. The moment they started
walking, Jounouchi looked behind him. Am I really getting
paranoid? He didn’t have that strong feeling of
being followed like before, but still…
“Onii-chan?”
“Yeah…yeah,
I’m coming.”
It started to
rain soon after they left the park. Jounouchi was bored to death, but
Shizuka enjoyed it immensely. It made his stomach boil with helpless
anger when seeing her so happy while she was listening to the sounds of
everyone around her, her imagination filling in the missing images. It’s
not fair. Damnit!
“Onii-chan!”
She kept calling him, trying to involve him and he grudgingly obliged -
he wanted to make her happy, and if he needed to be Otogi’s
best friend for it…so be it, but it wasn’t by
choice. He didn’t like him talking about his business success
and how everything seemed to come on his path at the right time.
Meanwhile, Otogi kept holding onto Shizuka’s hand, and
whenever he didn’t look, they’d exchange a quick
kiss.
Sickening,
really, but Jounouchi shoved his hands in his pockets and decided to
not give into his childish desire of beating Otogi up. The game
designer suggested a fancy restaurant for dinner and when Jounouchi
protested, he gallantly offered to pay for him. If there was something
Jounouchi hated the most, it was charity, especially when it was
‘offered’ to him like this. He had no choice,
though; he didn’t have enough money on him to pay for it
himself, suggesting going somewhere else had Otogi’s veto and
he didn’t want to escalate the situation. Annoyed, he went
with Otogi and Shizuka to the restaurant. He was used to eating an
awful lot of food, but as he didn’t want to run up the bill,
he contented himself with a few sushi rolls.
“Aren’t
you eating any more, onii-chan?” Shizuka asked in surprise as
he described his plate to her.
“I’m
not that hungry, Shizuka,” he said, the lie easily slipping
over his lips.
“Your
sister told me about how much you can wolf down,” Otogi
chuckled. “Are you really sure those rolls are enough for
you?”
Jounouchi
glared at him. He was going to have a private conversation with Otogi
later, oh yes. If there was one thing he hated even more, it was people
rubbing salt in the wound.
As soon as
dinner was over, Jounouchi suggested that they go home, as it was
getting late. Draping her coat around her shoulders, he waited for
Shizuka to say goodbye to Otogi and he casually looked around. The
restaurant was in the middle of a fancy shopping street, with stores
way above his usual budget. The street lanterns were lit, the rain
drizzling from the sky, and no one in sight but a few late shoppers and
some people looking for a place to eat.
Jounouchi
narrowed his eyes.
He
hadn’t shaken that feeling of being followed completely, and
wasn’t that Bakura he saw? He couldn’t imagine the
shy kid from school in an area like this. The kid had told him he
always went straight home after school, spending the rest of the day in
the apartment his father bought for him. Jounouchi vaguely remembered
Bakura telling him something about his old man being an archaeologist,
but like so many other things, it had gone in one ear and out the other.
Even stranger
was Bakura’s company. Jounouchi couldn’t make it
out from this distance, but there was another guy with him, with the
weirdest hairdo he’d ever seen. It looked spiky,
gravity-defying, and generally so absurd that he was convinced it was
some kind of wig. The other had remarkably dark skin, an even stranger
combination with his blond hair, and he was wearing some kind of metal
around his arms and neck; as it was dark, Jounouchi couldn’t
really see exactly what. Weird. Oh well,
he’d just found something to pick on Bakura about the next
Monday.
“Onii-chan,
are you coming?” Shizuka asked.
“Yeah,
sure!” he answered, looking over his shoulder once more.
Bakura looked different. Something with his hair, but what exactly?
“You
know those guys?” Otogi suddenly asked.
“One
of them is in my class,” Jounouchi mumbled. “I
don’t know the other one.”
“They
give me the creeps,” Otogi answered and he sounded serious.
For once, Jounouchi didn’t mock him - they gave him the
creeps too. He wondered briefly if it was Bakura
who was following him. Still, if he did, the kid would be too smart to
just show himself so openly like that, wouldn’t he? It simply
didn’t make sense. Bakura didn’t say more than two
words in a class, kept to the background and was even embarrassed at
the notion of the fan club some of the girls had created for him. It
just didn’t make any sense.
“Let’s
go home,” he said. Two against two, if it came to fighting.
He didn’t have the slightest clue about Otogi’s
fighting abilities, but Bakura would go down in a breeze - Jounouchi
had seen him at PE, and the kid already keeled over when catching a
ball.
“Are
you going to show us some movies, onii-chan?”
He gritted at
the ‘us’ in her words, which meant that Otogi would
come along to their place. He didn’t like to show his
apartment to anyone else. He’d cleaned a bit, but still - it
was in a rundown neighborhood and no one cared about the maintenance.
Shizuka couldn’t see it and probably wouldn’t care
in the least, but Otogi would have more ammunition to shoot him down
with. Grumbling, he stuffed his hands in his jacket once again and
startled listing the movies he could show. One big advantage with the
Internet was the availability of movies; Jounouchi didn’t
care that he was downloading things illegally and he’d built
up quite a library this way.
Otogi added
his two cents about the movie titles and promised Shizuka to tell her
all about it if they’d ended up watching a movie.
“We
can also play a game,” he continued talking. “There
are lots of games especially adjusted to the visually impaired. Card
games, for example, or dice…”
It was really
getting dark now. Where was that bus stop? Jounouchi half-heartedly
listened to Otogi, getting fed up with his smooth talk and
Shizuka’s swooning replies. Three is a crowd,
he thought bitterly, feeling immediately guilty that he
wasn’t happy for Shizuka’s happiness. She was
obviously in love with that guy, who was he to criticize it?
“Shizuka,
we can…” His voice trailed off.
“What,
onii-chan? I want to go home…it’s so
cold.”
“Too
cold, actually,” Otogi muttered. They were standing still, in
complete darkness. There wasn’t even a lantern pole to be
seen, even though they just walked over a rather enlightened street.
With no bystanders around to ask, Jounouchi felt it in his bones that
something was very, very off.
“Who’s
there?” he suddenly cried out, startling both Shizuka and
Otogi. The latter tightened his grip on Shizuka, who huddled in her
coat, quietly asking what was going on.
Silence.
“Who’s
there?”
“We
have to find the bus stop,” Otogi said, shooting nervous
glances left and right. Shizuka hung onto his arm, her eyes blind to
their surroundings, but instinctively picking up on their fear and
anxiety.
“Where
are we? Are we lost?”
“Poor
little sheep.”
“Who’s
there?” Jounouchi asked again. He took a relaxed stance,
moving his feet a little apart, balling his fists. He was ready for
action whenever necessary. “Show yourself!”
A drawn-out
cackle was his answer, followed by a different, deeper, boisterous
chuckle. The sound approached them, and finally he heard footsteps.
Jounouchi braced himself. The footsteps sounded regular; no one was
running towards them, and the darkness seemed to light up a little - as
if it moved away from whoever approaching.
“Poor
little sheep.”
“Bakura?”
Jounouchi asked, flabbergasted. It was Bakura, and
he looked creepily different.
His hair was
wilder, spiked up, the bone white strands pointing in all directions.
He was wearing a simple light blue jacket with a blue and white striped
shirt under it, combined with faded blue jeans. He should have been
shivering from the cold, but the temperature didn’t seem to
affect him. Jounouchi’s eyes went wide when he saw what else
Bakura was wearing - some kind of golden pendant, brightly glowing, in
the shape of a circle. The triangle in the middle of the circle bore a
stylized eye similar to the one on the puzzle piece
he’d stolen, and the prongs attached to the circle
rattled faintly.
“Look
what I found,” he said slowly. “Bait.”
“What
the hell is going on?” Jounouchi demanded. “Why do
you look so funny?”
“Heh,
he thinks you look funny.” The second person, the same
Jounouchi had seen before, became visible, the darkness moving away
from him as if he was parting a sea. It looked more to Jounouchi like
the strange shadows were afraid
of this person who casually came to stand next to Bakura. He was
slightly taller, though that effect was exaggerated by his wild
hairstyle.
“Who
are you people? What do you want from us?” Otogi asked.
Jounouchi
gaped at the boy standing next to Bakura. His sharp eye already caught
the foreign object in the other’s hand; a rod of some sort
with a sphere on top of it, carrying the same eye as on
Bakura’s pendant. The sphere had a sharp wing on each side
and the whole thing looked preposterous to Jounouchi - but the eye was
disturbingly familiar, and he was starting to feel rather ill. Fuck
I’m screwed.
“Nothing,”
Bakura answered. “Nothing but a few answers…then
we’ll decide whether to let you go, to let you live, or to
let you…well, die.”
Otogi wrapped
his arms protectively around Shizuka, who softly whimpered. She huddled
close to her boyfriend, shivering.
The blond
stranger tilted his head and licked his lips rather vulgarly.
“Mmm… pretty,” he said, his eyes locking
on Shizuka.
“Don’t
even think about it,” Jounouchi said,
growling. “You don’t scare us with your stupid
trinkets. Go home, Bakura.”
“Why
are you so mean to Master Host? I don’t think so,”
Bakura answered. “I’m not interested in you.
You’re trivial.”
“Master
Host? What the fuck are you talking about?”
“It
would go above your head, so I won’t even try to explain it
to you,” Bakura said dryly.
“There
are powers existing in this world that go way beyond your imagination.
Look at you, pitifully waving your fists, as if you think you can do
something that will hurt us?”
“I’m
damned good with my fists,” Jounouchi snarled. “Not
many have walked away on two legs after I was finished with
them.”
“What’s
taking so long?” The other spoke up. “You promised
I could have them, Bakura.”
“In
a minute, Malik,” Bakura said. “First, I want my
answers, then they’re all yours.”
“Over
my dead body,” Jounouchi retorted.
“Yes,
exactly…” The one called Malik looked very pleased
with Jounouchi’s shown aggression, and licked his lips again.
“The
kid with the Sennen Puzzle. You know him. Where is he?”
Yuugi?
“I don’t know what the fuck
you’re talking about…!”
“You
know him as Mutou Yuugi,” Bakura said, his voice dangerously
edgy. “Master Host knows this via other classmates. They have
seen him with the golden box. The Holy Container! Where is it, where is
he?”
“I’m
not a fucking tourist office!” Jounouchi cried out, repeating
what he previously yelled at Mahaado. It was a
déjà vu, and his gut was telling him that it was
a bad déjà vu.
Otogi looked
confused. “Mutou Yuugi? That kid from the
Ga…”
“He’s
a nobody!” Jounouchi interrupted him, drowning his voice out.
“If this is some kind of joke, Bakura, it’s
certainly not funny! Now get lost before I get really mad!”
“Do
try your best,” Bakura answered, the light from his pendant
still bright. “You don’t impress us, Jounouchi.
Where’s the kid?”
Fortunately,
Otogi didn’t speak again, and Jounouchi shook his head.
“He
left school. I don’t know where he is. Too bad, you have to
fucking find him on your own.”
“Aww,”
Malik said. “No cooperation?”
Bakura hissed.
“I need that Puzzle. You’re going to bring me to
him.”
“No
way,” Jounouchi refused. “You can find him for
yourself. Try a phone book.” He didn’t need the
eerie glow of Bakura’s pendant and the shadows dancing on his
face to figure out that something was terribly wrong with his
classmate; he almost looked possessed. But even if
he was, it didn’t matter; Shizuka was his only concern. He
needed to protect Shizuka, he needed to get them all out of here.
Bakura took a
few steps forward, followed by his sinister
‘friend’. Malik chuckled low in his throat, both
his hands on that strange object with the eye, holding onto it
possessively.
“I
like it when they don’t cooperate. I can make
them cooperate…”
“Soon,”
Bakura said casually. “Last chance, Jounouchi. You can get
your friends out of here alive if you just tell me where the kid
is…I only need his Puzzle…”
I
wonder what he’d say if I told him the Puzzle was incomplete.
I don’t think he knows…He opened his
mouth to divulge that piece of information, but decided against it the
very last moment. Whatever he was going to say, they wouldn’t
walk out of here alive. Bakura didn’t have any intention to
have them walk away alive; Malik hadn’t protested against his
words even though Bakura obviously had promised him some fun.
“I
don’t know where he is,” Jounouchi repeated and his
hand went to Shizuka’s arm. If they needed to run, he would
take the lead. He knew this area, even though it was harder to find his
way around with this strange darkness…that seemed to come
from the other two.
“Fine,
we’ll find them on our own,” Bakura heaved an
irritated sigh. His lips curled in a devilish grin, showing a very
sharp canines. “They’re all yours, if you want to
have some fun.”
“Run!”
Jounouchi yelled, immediately turning around, grabbing Shizuka with him
- and was frozen the same second.
“Onii-chan!”
Shizuka cried out.
“Jounouchi!
What’s wrong with you?” Otogi sounded panicked.
Jounouchi tried to move, but he couldn’t. He had thought that
it was for the better to run, as Bakura and Malik seemed to have powers
- because of their strange artifacts or not - and from his experience
with Mana and Mahaado, he knew physical force was futile. He gritted
his teeth, the only thing he could do in his state, and was overwhelmed
with an urge to…kill. That’s what you
want. It has always been inside of you, a voice echoed
through his mind. Give into it, Jounouchi. You know you
can’t resist. You want to put your hands around her soft
little neck. Look at her, bleating like a poor little lost sheep.
Abandoned by her mother, her father, her brother. Won’t you
help her out of her misery?
Jounouchi
found he suddenly had control over his body again, but not completely -
like a puppet on a string, he awkwardly turned around again to face
Shizuka and Otogi.
“Jounouchi!
What’s wrong with you, man?”
“Onii-chan…Ryuuji,
what’s going on?”
Do
you hear how she calls for him, not you? She doesn’t want you
near. She calls him Ryuuji and she laughs at him, not at you. You hate
him, don’t you? Oooh, he’ll be next…but
first, he has to watch how his beloved dies. You want her to die,
don’t you? She’ll sing for you, a beautiful song,
as long as you want, as high as you want.
“Jounouchi!
What’s wrong with you! Get a grip!”
He
couldn’t resist. The voice in his head, this overpowering
urge to feel flesh between his fingers, to feel the fear, to hear the
cries…his body moved on its own, his vision was strangely
unfocused, but still he could see everything. He realized he was moving
towards Shizuka, hands reaching for her. My own sister!
There was nothing he could do to stop it. He registered the abhorred
look on Otogi’s face, who tried to yank Shizuka away, and he
heard laughing, close to the left of him.
“What’s
gotten into you? She’s your sister! Jounouchi!”
He heard a
high-pitched scream, and then Shizuka’s voice, pleading. She
called his name, finally she’s calling for me,
but she’s too late, too late for everything.
The voice all but sung in his head, urging him on. Jounouchi was aware
that he was forcing his hands around her neck, convinced he was going
to kill her, strangle her to death - and he couldn’t care
less.
There was this
little voice in the back of his mind, howling, begging him to stop. She’s
your sister. The one you swore to protect from everything and
everyone... your whole future revolves around her. What are you doing! Was
this Otogi’s voice, or his own? Why were all these voices in
his head, and why was he listening to any of them? He was Jounouchi
Katsuya, he had a voice on his own. He’d made his own
decisions for so long, he knew who he was, who his friends were, who
his sister was…and yet he was standing here with
his hands around her neck.
Too much
noise. He wanted to cry and to laugh at the same time; he wanted to run
away and stand still.
Fight it! Otogi’s voice, that was for sure. She’s
your sister! Your sister! My sister! His own voice chimed
in, reminding him what he was doing. The third voice, the unknown voice
was fading away, slowly, too slowly…he heard Shizuka cry, he
knew she was prying at his hands, and yet it still felt as if he was
detached, watching from a sideline. He could still hear the laughing,
echoing in his mind, malice and venom dripping off of it.
Whatever they
had done to him, he wouldn’t give in to this - he was
stronger than anything they tried to pull off, and Jounouchi forced
himself to loosen his grip on his sister’s neck, horror
overtaking his earlier urge to hurt and kill. No
one… no one can make me hurt my sister!
It was just in a blink of an eye, but the bloodcurdling scream he heard
wasn’t his, nor Shizuka’s, and it broke whatever
spell held him in his power. Jounouchi stepped backwards, almost
tumbling to the floor.
“Otogi!”
he yelled. The game designer was holding his side, blood dripping over
his fingers. Blood?
He looked just as surprised as Jounouch was bewildered about the whole
situation, and his mouth opened for another cry of pain, when suddenly
his eyes widened and he fell to his knees.
“Otogi!”
Shizuka
was crying, calling for her brother between sobs, shifting from one
foot to another, literally left in the dark. She couldn’t
see, couldn’t understand what was going on, and she kept
prying at her own throat as if she could still feel
Jounouchi’s fingers around them.
“Delicious,”
a voice spoke, drifting through the shadows. Jounouchi recognized it
immediately - it was the same voice that had spoken in his mind.
“Pretty
pretty blood….too slow, too much noise, too
short…”
Jounouchi
looked around him, eyes darting back and forth.
This…supernatural darkness or whatever it was was still
surrounding them, blocking anything from his view. Otogi was lying on
the ground, the clothes on his back slashed open. He’d barely
had the time to realize what was happening to him; whatever God there
was, he had shown mercy to Otogi to have him die before the pain would
settle in.
Jounouchi had
once thought that he’d witnessed his father die, as the man
had slumped to the floor, collapsing into a heap. He’d been
nothing but a kid at the time, a boy around seven, and he had bawled
his eyes out. He learned soon enough that his father had passed out
from too much alcohol and the next time it happened, he’d
stepped over his father as he lay somewhere drunk on the floor.
This was
death. Otogi had died, stabbed to death…and when Jounouchi
looked up, he saw Malik hovering over his victim, his artifact in his
hand and…turned into a dagger. It was a sharp blade, and
long enough to slash through clothing and…he
didn’t want to think about it, but he was sure
Otogi’s lungs had been punctured. Quickly, Jounouchi grabbed
Shizuka’s wrists, trying to pull her close. She immediately
started to fight, kicking her feet, too confused and too upset to
recognize her brother.
“How
boring. You said you could keep them alive and torture them for hours,
Malik!”
“He
was noisy. I hate the fucking noise! Shut the fuck up!”
Bakura
appeared again, his pendant still glowing. “Interesting that
he could withstand the influence of the Rod,” he said, baring
his sharp teeth again. “You would’ve proven
interesting, but I’ve got other things to do. Have fun with
them, Malik. Just don’t make a mess like you did with that
blond chick, all right?”
“She
was feisty,” Malik said, grinning like a loon. “I
like ‘em feisty…” He turned towards
Shizuka.
“You
bastard…” Jounouchi wanted to say more, but
suddenly Bakura backed away, looking around him as if he was hearing
something. Even Malik stopped dead in his tracks, the dagger still in
his hand.
“What
is it, Bakura?”
“Something
just entered…” Bakura looked confused and insecure
for one split second, then growled. “Finish them off! We have
to leave soon-”
Before Malik
could respond, something purple flew past him, knocking him over with
such force that he lost his grip on the artifact.
“Idiot!” Bakura yelled, slightly panicked, and his fingers clutched around his pendant. “You can’t get me here! Are you really that foolish, to challenge the one who rules the Shadows?”
Jounouchi
wrapped both his arms around Shizuka, the girl going limp in his arms,
tired of fighting.
“Onii-chan…”
“Shizuka,
we have to run,” he whispered. His view was blocked when the
purple figure came to stand in front of him, his back turned. It was a
humanoid shaped form, clad in some kind of armor, holding a tall staff
in its right hand, pointing it directly at Bakura. It was distracting
the other more than enough to forsake his grip on the shadows around
them, and Jounouchi noticed how he could make out the faint outlines of
their surroundings once again. There was the street, the
pavement… he tugged at Shizuka.
“We
have to run, now,” he insisted. “Hurry,
hurry!”
“B-but…Ryuuji…”
“Shizuka,
come on! We have to run, now!”
“Ryuuji!
We can’t go without him!”
“He’s
dead! Come on!”
“Wh…”
She couldn’t even protest as he forcefully dragged her away,
tearing his eyes away from Otogi’s body on the street. He
started to run, forgetting that Shizuka neither had his stamina nor
could hold up with his pace, and he dragged her along with him. From
the corner of his eyes he could see Malik lying halfway on the
pavement, the dagger out of his hands, a few meters away. For a brief
moment, Jounouchi considered grabbing it, but quickly decided against
it. He couldn’t care less if Malik was dead or not, but he
didn’t want anything to do with those strange items, the
Sennen things as Bakura had called them…and Bakura was a
riddle for another time, now he needed to bring them into safety.
Jounouchi
couldn’t think of any other place where they were safe than
the Game Shop. No cop in the world would believe his story about his
possessed classmate that wielded a weird pendant with an eye on it and
teamed up with an even crazier kid who killed in cold blood. Not
knowing exactly why he was running into that direction, Shizuka crying
and calling his name as she was dragged along, but he knew he was safe
there.
“Onii-chan,
I can’t…!” Shizuka suddenly let herself
fall to the floor, her legs unable to carry her any longer. Jounouchi
almost lost his grip on her hand and he turned around, gathering his
sister in his arms.
“Just
hold on a little longer, please,” he begged her. The Game
Shop wasn’t that far from here, and in his panicked and
confused mind it was the only place sticking out to him. He
didn’t even consider going to his own home nor to
Shizuka’s - he wanted to go to the Game Shop, as if little
Yuugi could protect them somehow. He would worry about everything
later; they had to be safe first.
“Ryuuji…”
she sobbed. “Onii-chan, what happened? We have to go back for
him…”
“There’s
nothing we can do for him now, Shizuka,” Jounouchi said,
patting her on the shoulders as she clung to him. “Not
now…” Not ever.
“Is
he…is he really dead? I heard him scream…it was
horrible…!”
“Shizuka…”
“He
can’t be dead!” She started crying loudly, more
tears spilling over her cheeks. He didn’t want her to go into
shock, and gently coaxed her along, pace above walking speed, to get
her away from the scene as far as possible. They didn’t seem
to be followed right now, for which he was extremely thankful -
anything more happening this night and they wouldn’t both
survive. He almost counted their steps, mentally calculating how far
they were away from the Game Shop, and his relief was apparent when he
finally saw the quaint building.
Timeline
III, known universe: Domino City, Japan
Cold.
Wet.
His hair started to turn damp from the continuous drizzle of rain, and
the wind tugged at his shenti, the fabric too thin for this type of
weather. His cloak was all that was keeping him warm and he tried to
wrap it around himself as much as possible. The slippers on his feet
were already soiled by mud from the garden he was trespassing in, twigs
snapping and leaves crumbling as he walked, searching for that weak
light he saw earlier.
The hunger
pains were worsening by the second; he was using the last of his
strength to even move, to put his one foot in front of the other,
forcing himself with pure willpower to stand upright and walk.
He was approaching the light, his thoughts wrapped in prayers to the
Gods for food, dry clothing, people…if there were any
people, he could ask them where he was, what was going on. Even if they
didn’t know all the answers, they would be able to give him
at least some kind of information, wouldn’t they? Pushing
some low-hanging branches out of the way, he made his way through what
he thought was a garden, finally ending up on some kind of
path…a path filled with pebbles. Too distracted by the
hunger pains to feel his hurting feet, he stumbled towards the light,
which was shining from some kind of dwelling.
It was made
out of wood, the planks dripping from the steadily increasing rain. He
searched for a door, finding it on the north side, and he banged his
hand on the door, barely realizing he was crying out in his native
language, to please open up. There was no answer. Desperately, he tried
the door handle himself, and to his relief, it opened immediately. His
luck would be more complete if he would find something to eat, and he
smiled in deep gratitude when he saw the Gods hadn’t left
him, after all. The shed - there were all kinds of tools here, and
nothing indicated any inhabitation - was also room to a rickety table
and a chair, and on the table was some kind of box and a strange
looking goblet in screaming red and yellow colors.
Quickly he
went to the table, opening the box. There was bread inside, and
forgetting all his manners, he hastily took a few large bites, so hasty
that he almost choked. The funny goblet had a large cap onto it and
when he took it off, its content revealed to be milk. Gratefully
drinking, he sat down, relief evident on his face. He was so occupied
by his food that he failed to notice two pairs of curious eyes,
carefully watching him.
Yami
wasn’t so sure what he was supposed to be thinking. For
millennia, he’d been trapped in a golden object, and for the
first time since millennia, he had possession of a body again, able to
walk and move around as much as he wanted to, to pick up things
himself, to turn on the TV if he wanted to…he felt strangely
naked despite being clothed, and strangely out of balance.
After Mana had
left and Yuugi rushing after her, apparently having forgotten something
to ask, he had wandered around the apartment while Anzu had gone to the
kitchen to fix them some tea, simply finding ways to pass the time and
grow more used to his new body.
Yami stood in
front of the large bookcase, the large volumes on history immediately
catching his attention. Was all this talk about timelines true? Did he
believe them, those two who bore such uncanny resemblance to two
monsters from a popular card game? He should believe them, after all
he’d seen involving the Sennen Items - the memory of Pegasus
and his Eye was still fresh. Curiously, he reached for a book and
plucked it from the shelf, opening it. It felt so…heavy in
his arms.
“Mou
hitori no…I mean, Yami,” Anzu said as she entered
the study, carrying two cups of tea. It didn’t surprise her
that he was standing in front of a bookcase, with a large book on
Ancient Pharaohs in his hands.
“Anzu,”
he said, closing the book and returning it to its place on the shelf.
“Ah, tea.”
“I
thought we both could use something warm,” she said. Her
stomach was a little unsettled from the warm and spicy food she had for
lunch, but it was nothing worrisome. She glanced out the window - it
was raining. She moved to sit on the windowsill, patting next to her
for him to sit down.
“How
do you feel?”
“I
feel…awkward,” he said as his fingers fumbled for
the tea cup. “When I was still sharing aibou’s
body, everything came so naturally to me. It is like I have to learn
everything all over again.”
“Still,
it’s a great opportunity,” Anzu said, smiling over
the rim of her cup to him.
“That
is true,” he agreed, blowing at the hot liquid. “I
am curious as to how long this spell will remain, though.”
“Let’s
just…not think about that already.” She placed a
hand on his knee, keeping her gaze focused on him.
“You
are right,” he said. “Let just think about the
matters at hand for now.”
“Are
you going to run off to save the world again?”
He looked a
little quizzically at her, then down at her hand lying on his knee, but
he didn’t comment on it.
“If
that is what is expected of me, I will do so, Anzu. I am here to find
my name and my memories, and to save the world from
destruction.”
“You
already went through so much,” she said, her fingers tracing
idle patterns on the fabric of his pants. “And according to
Mana, there’s even more awaiting you.”
“If
I am truly a Pharaoh…then I will face what is awaiting me
with pride and dignity,” he said, sipping his tea.
“I cannot sit down and watch idly while others do the
fighting.”
“You’ve
already fought so much. Duelist Kingdom…”
He looked at
her, crimson red eyes unreadable. “I would not have gotten
this far without you,” he said.
“You’re
a Pharaoh,” she said, smiling as she put her teacup down,
barely emptied. “You’ll face whatever challenge
that’s on your path and you’ll conquer them
all.”
“I…”
He was about
to answer, but Anzu had closed the distance between them and softly
kissed him, her lips barely brushing his, tasting the tea
he’d just been drinking.
“Anzu…Anzu?”
She
immediately pulled back, cheeks flushed, and shook her head, sending
her dark bangs flying.
“It’s
nothing, I just wanted to do that,” she said, immediately
grabbing her cup of tea again to have something to hold onto. Yami
brought his fingers to his lips, tracing the outline as if he wanted to
seal her kiss into them. She lowered her eyes, waiting for the
rejection to come.
They’d
never spoken about this with each other before…the few times
they had interacted had been during Duelist Kingdom. He was occupied by
the tournament, and she hadn’t found the opportunity to talk
to him about this - the situation never adequate to pull him aside and
talk to him in private.
Had she just
ruined any chance she had? Had she thrown away the rest of her own
dignity by just kissing him out of the blue?
As he remained
silent, her hopes started to wither away. She took another sip of her
tea, almost burning her tongue. It was too stupid to even
think of.
“Anzu,”
he finally spoke.
“No,
Yami, it’s fine,” she hurriedly said, not looking
him directly in the eyes. Shivering lightly, as if the temperature had
considerably dropped, she remained sitting on the windowsill, enjoying
the other’s company. As no other answer came, Anzu knew
enough and she stared at her cup of tea, a silence settling over them,
though not uncomfortable.
Yuugi was on
his way back to the living room when a door on his right opened and
Mahaado came out, tugging at his robes as if huddling close to them. He
looked troubled, but he schooled his face in a carefully neutral
expression when he saw Yuugi.
“Prince,”
he simply said.
“Mahaado,”
Yuugi greeted him, “I hope you rested well?”
He nodded
affirmatively, a ghost of a smile on his lips. “Yes, I was
able to get a little rest. Has my Apprentice left you all by
yourself?”
“Mana-chan
had work to do,” Yuugi said. “I was on my way back
to the living room.”
“Let
us go there, it will be much more comfortable and warm in the living
room than standing in the hallway.”
Yuugi walked
quietly with him, curiosity on his mind. “Mana-chan told us
about two timelines that still needed to be restored,” he
struck up a conversation. “She said one was an Ancient
Egypt…”
“She
told you too much already,” Mahaado interrupted him,
growling. He quickly bowed to him. “Forgive me, Prince. I
thought that my Apprentice was aware enough of the situation to not
divulge that kind of information with you, out of fear
of…”
“Not
disturbing the timelines anymore,” Yuugi finished his
sentence. “Don’t worry, she told me barely enough
to even try to imagine what the timeline could be.” Our
Pharaoh there is hard and evil. It was hard on him to
believe it - but he blindly trusted Mana’s honesty, as he had
felt safe and comfortable in both Mana’s and
Mahaado’s presence. He believed them on their word, no matter
how fantastic their stories might be.
The tall
magician clicked with his tongue, not amused at all, but he
didn’t comment on it. Yuugi looked up at him, his eyes wide
and questioning. Mahaado noticed, and a little reluctantly, he asked
what Yuugi’s question might be.
“I
just…I just wanted to know what the other timeline
was,” he said, suddenly halted as Mahaado made no further
movement as to open the door to the living room. Yuugi blinked a few
times as the other lowered his head, sighing gravely.
“Prince,
in that timeline, your Puzzle was never completed. That world is
doomed.”
“Oh…”
Yuugi knew Mahaado was telling him too much already, just like Mana had
said. His hand went to his chest to touch the familiar chain where the
Item would be dangling from - a shot of panic surged through
him when he realized it wasn’t there until it dawned him that
Yami was the one wearing it. Smiling sheepishly, he waited for Mahaado
to open the door, but the words came softly as if he didn’t
have any control over it.
“How
could that be? Jii-chan took the Puzzle with him from Egypt, and
brought it to Domino, where I solved it…was
it…was it because of me that it was never solved?”
“I
am sorry, Prince,” Mahaado said. “It was because of
Jounouchi Katsuya, who took a piece of the Puzzle away and threw it
into a swimming pool. As such, the Puzzle was never completed, denying
the Pharaoh from coming into that world, and the events were twisted
and torn beyond repair.”
“Jounouchi-kun…”
Yuugi was baffled. He could recall it all to well, the time when he
still went to school with lead in his stomach and feeling awkward and
outcast, way before he would be friends with the others. Jounouchi had
been nothing short of a bully, together with Honda, and
they’d picked on Yuugi a lot. One day, Jounouchi had mocked
him and teased Yuugi about the golden box he brought with him to
school, to solve the puzzle in it during recess. He suddenly made the
link between him missing the center piece just before he was about to
finish it - and how his grandfather had given it to him, telling him
that a ‘friend’ had stopped by, soaking wet, to
deliver the piece. Jounouchi had thrown it in the swimming
pool?
“If
it is any consolation, Prince, he isn’t the same Jounouchi
there as you know him here. Unlike in this timeline, he never left that
gang of bullies, and never joined you in friendship.”
“I
can’t believe it…”
“I
am upsetting you,” Mahaado said. “Enough has been
told. For everybody’s sake, I will not talk about the other
timelines any longer. We…” His voice suddenly
hitched. Yuugi quickly looked up as he’d been crestfallen
about this other Jounouchi, aware of the magician blacking out for a
moment. Just like before, he thought, before
Mahaado had cast the spell to separate him and his
Other…Yami.
“Are
you all right?” he asked. He could bring Mahaado back to his
bedroom for some more rest, and he was about to suggest it when he
forcefully shook his head.
“I
am fine, Prince. It is just…something about this timeline
that sets me off every now and then. I do not know why…when
we arrived here, I thought this was the untainted, perfect timeline we
were searching for, so we could work from here to restore the others.
Something is still…outside of this world and I cannot figure
out why or what.”
“Let’s
sit down for a moment,” Yuugi urged him, afraid the tall man
would fall over again. He hadn’t been resting for that long,
and it was obvious how much everything was taxing him. Mahaado opened
the door and they entered the living room.
Yuugi beamed
at Yami and Anzu who were sitting in the windowsill, enjoying a cup of
tea. It wasn’t only for his own curiosity that he’d
gone after Mana, but also to leave Anzu and Yami alone. He
wasn’t blind; he knew what his best friend was feeling for
his Other. His Other.
“Mmm,
tea!” he said.
“There’s
enough left,” Anzu said, returning a brilliant smile though
it didn’t reach her eyes, and she jumped off the windowsill.
“Oh,
I’ll get it!” Yuugi reached the white porcelain
tea-set simultaneously with her, but Anzu was a little faster, already
holding the large teapot up. Lowering her head, she proceeded to pour
two cups, one for him and one for Mahaado. Yuugi looked at her
quizzically as she held her head angled away from him…was
she on the verge of crying?
When she
handed him the cup, he noticed that Yami had come to stand close to
him, whereas Mahaado sat down in his seat again. Anzu smiled rather
faintly and went to bring him a cup, turning her back to Yuugi.
Confused, he
glanced at Yami. His Other’s expression hadn’t
changed, not knowing what was going on, Yuugi went with him to the
large table, taking a seat themselves.
“I
thank you,” Mahaado said as soon as Anzu handed him the cup.
“You’re
welcome,” she replied and refilled her own as well, pointedly
skipping over Yami. She sat down as well, and the only sound for a
moment was the stirring of the teaspoons.
“Have
you called home?”
“Yes,
we told them that we were staying at a friend’s for the
night,” Anzu answered. “My parents don’t
mind much, and Yuugi’s grandfather was fine with it as well.
I texted Jounouchi that he didn’t need to worry, and that
we’d tell him all about it later.”
“He’ll
be pretty mad if he knew what kind of adventure he’s
missing,” Yuugi said, sipping his tea.
“This
is not really an adventure,” Mahaado objected. “My
Apprentice and I will do the work of restoring the timelines, and make
sure that nothing happens to you in the meantime.”
“Mana
left to attend to…some business,” Anzu spoke up,
not knowing that Yuugi already had informed him. “I hope she
will return soon.”
“She
will,” Mahaado said with confidence in his voice.
“She is strong and she knows what she has to do to restore
the timeline in question.”
“And
what is that?” Yami asked, as he saw an opening to learn more
about these timelines and the situation at hand. Mahaado gave him a
pained look, berating himself mentally for his slip of the tongue.
“She
needs to restore an Ancient Egypt timeline,” he chose his
words carefully. “The jump to there is easier for her to make
as we both have ties to Ancient Egypt, of course. It was not necessary
for the both of us to go. She has to do this...alone.”
“How
sad,” Anzu said, not liking how Mahaado had spoken his last
sentence. “Intervening so drastically, all alone.”
“How
can an Ancient Egypt timeline be disturbed? That is such a long time
ago,” Yami said, exchanging a look with Yuugi. He
didn’t pay that much attention to classes when they were at
school, but by visiting the museum and listening to the history teacher
as an exception, he knew that the era of Ancient Egypt had been at
least three millennia ago.
“Believe
me, it is still happening,” Mahaado answered. “New
worlds are born, old world are dying when they are completed according
to the Great Timeline…and every world needs their pivotal
moments when they start to take shape.”
“And
solving the Puzzle…or rather, me getting sealed in the
Puzzle was such an event,” Yami said. Yuugi patted him on the
knee reassuringly.
“Exactly,”
Mahaado said, sipping his tea, relaxing back into the large chair.
“What
went wrong so an Ancient Egypt timeline was disturbed?”
The magician
closed his eyes, placing the cup on the low table next to his chair.
This was the question he’d been dreading, and really
didn’t want to answer. He could tell them again that he
couldn’t divulge this information, but this was his Pharaoh.
He couldn’t deny him, and he had a right to know the truth; a
right to know how his loyal servant had failed him utterly. I
can live with his contempt. I cannot live with this heavy heart.
Mahaado looked
away from the others and abruptly rose to his feet, crossing the
distance between his chair and the window, turning his back to them. He
crossed his arms in front of his chest, his guilt too much to even try
to look them, his Pharaoh foremost, right in the eyes.
“In
that time…” he whispered, voice wavering.
“The Mahaado of that time fled for the consequences when he
accepted his vocation for Priest. He fled the Royal Palace, forsook his
duties and obligations and…”
As he fell
silent, the others remained silent as well. Yami had placed his hand
over Yuugi’s on his knee, and they were both squeezing. Yuugi
had taken Anzu’s hand to her surprise, rubbing gently over
her fingers. She was thankful for the soothing gesture and
would’ve shown him a grateful smile if she wasn’t
so focused on Mahaado’s story, literally sitting on the edge
of her seat.
“I
was a coward!” Mahaado barked, shaking his head furiously.
“I fled from the Palace, abandoning my duties and my
responsibilities, leaving the others to deal with the consequences. The
Mahaado of that time...I despise him!”
“But
you are not him,” Yuugi said. “You are another
Mahaado, the one and only Mahaado, who is restoring timelines and
making up for another one’s mistake…”
“I
hate him,” Mahaado gritted through clenched teeth, ignoring
Yuugi’s words. He stared out the window, watching the last
colors in the sky as the sun settled, preparing for the night.
“He should never have fled. It was his cowardly behavior that
disturbed the timeline and caused such grief and horror.”
“What
happened?” Anzu’s voice could barely be heard.
“When
he fled, that Mahaado took the Sennen Ring with him and disappeared,
out of reach, out of sight. The King of Thieves, Bakura, was supposed
to get the Ring by battling him.”
“Bakura,”
Yuugi repeated, memories of Duelist Kingdom springing to his mind. I
am a thief and a stealer of souls…
“As
Bakura didn’t get the Ring, he went back to the Palace to
battle the Pharaoh,” Mahaado continued.
“And...?”
“The
thief was killed, and the Pharaoh survived.”
“That’s
a good thing, right?” Anzu heaved a sigh of relief, this time
gently squeezing Yuugi’s fingers. He immediately returned the
gesture.
“No,
unfortunately not.” Mahaado stubbornly stared out the window.
“It pains me very much to tell this, but the Pharaoh needs to
die to save the world. In his death, he will seal the darkness with him
that threatened the world. As the Pharaoh continued to live, the Sennen
Puzzle started to corrupt him. Slowly, very slowly, the darkness
consumed him, attacking him starting with his heart. He was strong, my
Pharaoh…he really was…but even those with the
strongest of minds cannot hold the darkness at bay for so many years.
As he…as he continues to live, he will become an instrument
of darkness like Bakura was supposed to be, thus setting the timeline
off.”
“But
now that the thief is dead, Mahaado can return to the Palace,
right?” Anzu asked. “And stay with the
Pharaoh?”
“No,
Anzu,” Yuugi said. “The Sennen Ring was supposed to
be with Bakura, but he never got it, and thus he could never initiate
the other string of events leading up to the Pharaoh sacrificing
himself and sealing his soul and that darkness in the
Puzzle.” He glared at the Puzzle around Yami’s neck
as if he could burn the darkness out of it. Never in a million years
would he have thought that the Item served evil as well as good; the
notion horrified him.
“That…that
means that…you have to die,” Anzu said, widening
her eyes when realization settled in. “You were supposed to
die for Bakura to get the Ring, and the Pharaoh…”
“We
are already dead, my Apprentice and me,” Mahaado said.
“What we are is a reflection of our strong willpower and our heka
keeping us alive to make up for the mistakes we made and to correct the
timelines. As soon as every timeline is restored, we will cease to
exist.”
“Oh
no,” Yuugi gasped, and Yami looked shocked.
“Even
if I have to die to seal any kind of darkness, I would gladly do so to
save the world,” he said fiercely. “As long as I am
the one to die, not anyone else…”
“No,
Yami,” Yuugi said, voice hitching. Anzu blinked furiously a
few times to keep her eyes from tearing.
“It
can’t be so! There must be something we can do!”
“The
Pharaoh was never meant to live long,” Mahaado spoke up,
pointedly staring at the darkening sky. “Neither was
I.”
Both Anzu and
Yuugi looked at Yami, who stiffened and straightened, sitting upright.
“The
Gods have decided,” the magician said. “Fate and
destiny…and we helped them along the way.”
Yuugi pressed
closer to Yami, feeling absolutely miserable. He didn’t dare
to ask what had happened to the Mahaado of that time, and looking at
the man standing by the window, he understood what he meant by
‘helped them along the way’. The other Mahaado, how
cowardly or faulty he had been, had paid for his mistake very dearly.
Anzu was crying now, and he wanted nothing but to follow her example.
This all had been too much to take, and why Mahaado had told him all
this after all perplexed him, unable to see or understand the
man’s guilt.
No one really
cared for how much time was passing at that very moment. Arms wrapped
around their shoulders, trying to offer each other comfort, the three
remained seated, whispering softly words of solace, hugging every now
and then. As Yami sat in the middle and he was leaning on both of them,
the Puzzle dangled in between, the Item gently rocking back and forth.
Yuugi didn’t know whether to hate the Item or still be proud
of it. He settled on gratitude after all, because if it
weren’t for the very same Puzzle, he wouldn’t have
met Jounouchi, Honda, and most of all, his Other, who was sitting next
to him.
Anzu was the first to break up their circle, if only for the cramped position she was in, her back aching from leaning forward for so long. She squeezed Yuugi’s hand for the last time before standing up and searching in her purse for a handkerchief, fiercely rubbing at her face.
“I’m…I’m
going to freshen up,” she said to no one in particular,
almost tiptoeing around Mahaado who still stood in front of the window,
unmoving.
Yuugi stood up
as well, patting Yami on the shoulder. He kept an eye on Yuugi as he
went through the living room to switch on the lights. Yuugi went to
Mahaado, but when he saw that the magician was completely in a trance,
eyes closed and hands folded, he decided to not to disturb him.
“Mana-chan
isn’t back yet,” Yuugi spoke softly.
“Maybe I can find something to eat, or we can call for
take-out?”
“Very
well, aibou,” Yami agreed and stood up as well, not about to
let Yuugi do all the work.
“Let’s
go to the kitchen.”
As they left
the living room, Yuugi suddenly heard someone cry. Bewildered, he
searched for the source - it was Mana, smothering her sobs against
Anzu’s shoulder, a wet handkerchief in her hand.
“I…I
found her like this,” Anzu said, her other arm firmly around
the girl to support her. “I was in the bathroom when I heard
her, and when I went into the hallway she was standing there,
crying…”
“Mana-chan…”
Yuugi walked to the girl, placing his hand on her back. She flinched
from the touch, but didn’t pull away. Instead, she started to
bawl harder, pressing the soaked handkerchief to her face.
“Maybe
Mahaado can help her,” Yami suggested. It was obvious that
the girl was extremely upset, unable to even speak up, the tears
flowing like a dam that had been broken. Anzu nodded. “Yes,
we better go back to the living room…what were you doing out
here, anyway?”
“We
were looking for the kitchen,” Yuugi said sheepishly.
“To find something to eat…” It sounded
childish and spoiled compared to Mana’s apparent grief.
However, Anzu nodded again.
“As
soon as she’s calmed down, I’ll call for some
take-out,” she offered. “We need our strength, and
we don’t help ourselves if we starve.”
They walked
back to the warm living room, holding the crying Mana in between them,
trying to console her. She had stopped wailing, but there was no end to
the river of tears streaming over her cheeks; Yuugi quickly gave the
girl his own clean handkerchief and took the damp one away.
“Mana-chan…will
you tell us what happened?”
“I
can’t,” she managed to say between sobs.
Frustrated, Yuugi gritted his teeth. Whatever had happened, it had
shaken her bad, and she didn’t deserve it at all.
“You’d
better sit down and take it easy,” he told her. “We
bring you something to eat, all right? You’re not going
anywhere tonight…you’re staying with
us.”
Mana moved her
head a little, but he couldn’t figure out if she was nodding
as she turned away from him to sit down. If she already had noticed
Mahaado standing in front of the window, not looking up or around him,
she wasn’t commenting about it. Instead, she gratefully
accepted another clean handkerchief, pressing it to her swollen, puffy
eyes. Yuugi stacked a few cushions behind her back in an attempt to
make the girl as comfortable as possible. Whatever happened in Ancient
Egypt, it was bad enough to make her upset like this. She leaned back,
shivering.
“I’ll
go get a blanket,” Anzu said, despite the temperature being
rather high in the room. Yami sat down next to Mana, and
didn’t comment when she grabbed his sleeve.
“Pharaoh…”
“Mana,”
he spoke, keeping his voice low. “Will you tell me what
happened?”
“I’m
not allowed to…”
“I
am sorry,” he said and that caused another flood of tears.
Helplessly, he looked at Yuugi who also was at his wit’s end.
Mana tightened her grip on his sleeve, fingers clutching at the fabric.
Yami couldn’t do anything but to allow it; she apparently
needed that reassurance, and he wasn’t about to pull away and
upset her even more.
Both Yuugi and
Yami looked up as Anzu leaned between them, draping the warm woolen
blanket all over Mana.
“Poor
girl,” she said. “Your loyalty…both
yours and your Master’s…will kill you.”
She looked incredibly sad as she spoke, and Yuugi’s heart
almost broke. He reproached himself for not thinking about that sooner,
for not seeing sooner what was troubling both of them. Master and
Apprentice, Black Magician and Black Magician Girl. Loyal to their
Master, the Pharaoh. Yami.
“I found the anomaly,” Mahaado suddenly said, breaking the silence. Everyone but Mana startled, having forgotten about the magician who had been quiet in his trance for so long.
Mana looked
up, knees drawn to her chest, wrapped in the blanket.
“Master?”
“Apprentice,”
he said. “He is here, and he is in danger. We have to go,
now!”
“Wait
a minute!” Yuugi exclaimed, a hint of anger to his voice. Was
Mahaado really blind to his Apprentice’s grief? The girl was
tear-stricken and looked pale - she needed rest, not to run off
to…wherever again! Yami backed him up, not moving from
Mana’s side.
“Wait,
Mahaado! Who is here, and where do you have to go to?”
“Our
Pharaoh,” Mahaado said, and his smile was genuine, warm and
happy. “I finally found him. He is really, really
here!”
“Another
Pharaoh?” Yuugi looked dumbfounded.
“Really?”
Mana cried out, revived. She even tried to push the blanket off,
wrestling with the the slips of
the large, heavy piece of fabric.
Anzu put her
hands on Mana’s shoulders. “You better sit down and
rest…”
“No!
If our Pharaoh is here…he’s really here!”
“How…how
can you be so sure?” Yuugi asked.
Mana was
tired, but her smile was worth a thousand watts as she spoke up.
“Master can find our Pharaoh and his every incarnation
wherever he is, no matter what timeline or world. We’re
connected to each other, and even though it sometimes can take a little
time, Master always finds him. Always.”
“But
how can that be?”
“That
has to wait,” Mahaado interrupted. “We have to go, right
now! He is in danger, and if we do not save him, all is
lost!”
“We’ll
go with you,” Anzu said, taking her hands away from Mana
because she was unable to stop the girl. She immediately threw off the
blanket, kicking at it. She rubbed her eyes, irritating them even more.
“We
will return soon enough,” Mahaado refused sternly.
“We do not know how much we endanger this timeline as we
speak by having you meet the Pharaoh. We already told too
much…”
“We
are going with you, end of discussion,” Yami interrupted.
“Whatever version of me or another Pharaoh is out there, if
he is in danger, we must help him.”
“You’re
right,” Yuugi supported him, “we can help you!
You’re both exhausted, and all this is taking such a great
toll on you - we’ll help!”
“We
really do not have time for this…” Mahaado
hesitated, his mind running about the possibilities if he brought the
two Pharaohs and Yuugi together, in a public place…but it
was late in the evening, and every second he discussed and deliberated
this, was one second adding more to the danger closing in on his
Pharaoh.
“We
go,” he finally gave in, but not enthusiastically.
“Apprentice?”
“I’m
ready, Master,” she replied, clutching her wand to her chest.
Both their determination was more than apparent and despite the earlier
signs of exhaustion they both moved with considerable speed, and Yuugi,
Yami and Anzu had to hurry to keep up with them.
Timeline
I, Khemet
“…which
concludes the General’s report.”
Set’s
voice was neutral, as always. It would take many years of knowing the
High Priest personally to discern the small hint of disdain in his
voice, the aversion only audible to those who knew him very, very well.
Mana picked up on it, despite not being intimate friends with Set - she
had spend more than enough hours in his presence at the Court to at
least tell the difference in some of his tones of voice, the way he
spoke his words, to know that the High Priest was a very unhappy man.
Aishizu was
standing next to her, breathing steady and easy as usual.
Mana’s previous admiration for the woman had turned into
irritation. The Priestess was just standing there,
her eyes staring into nothing, her Tauk resting between her
collarbones, accepting everything calmly as it came. Mana felt
restless, wanting to do something, to scream something…but
there was nothing that she could do. She was still a Priestess at
Pharaoh Atemu’s Court, and she wasn’t allowed to
leave unless she was discharged by the Pharaoh himself.
Maybe that was
the only reason why Set was still here, she thought bitterly. If he
were to leave the Palace, Atemu would send out troops to bring him
back, forcefully if need be, just as he had done when Mahaado
disappeared - but where the magician Priest could shield himself with
his heka, the High Priest wouldn’t stand
a chance of hiding from the efficient army.
“Thank
you,” Atemu said, his voice lower than usual, calm and
composed as if absolutely nothing had happened, as if he
hadn’t killed the woman his High Priest had obviously cared
for.
It had only
been two days since Kisara’s lifeless body had been taken
away. Mana didn’t know where the poor girl was buried, and
she didn’t dare to talk to Set about it. His face was as
neutral and set in stone as always, but something had changed. His eyes
were glazed, not in sorrow or sadness, but in anger and hatred. His
movements were brusque and his words were clipped, and he seemed more
impatient than ever.
Akunadin, his
father, had been silent as usual - but now it seemed like he
didn’t speak at all anymore. Karim, Shaadah and Aishizu were
just completing the Court; Mana couldn’t actually remember
when the Pharaoh had asked them for their advice.
Set rolled up
the papyri, dropping them to the floor, uncaring. A boyish servant
quickly grabbed the papyri before it could hit the floor and carefully
stored it, making sure he didn’t anger or annoy the High
Priest in the process.
“May
I ask what this is all about, Great Pharaoh?” Shaadah finally
spoke, though he had trouble keeping his voice calm. They had been
listening all morning to reports and accounts concerning the military:
how many soldiers, how many spears and maces, how soon an army could be
mobilized…
“You
may ask,” Atemu answered, his hands curled around the
armrests of his throne. “I will answer you.”
The Priest
nodded, the fabric of his robe slightly creased. He moved a little
forward to watch his Pharaoh speak.
“The
Syrian delegates have left soon after,” Atemu said, leaving
out “the death of the girl”.
“They
were going to take this news with them, and I will not allow anyone to
mock the grandeur of Khemet.”
Shaadah
visibly paled, and Aishizu looked up, her Tauk glowing for a brief
moment.
“You
had them killed?” she all but cried out, startling the others.
“No
message will reach their homeland, no bodies will wash
ashore,” Atemu said dryly, humoring Aishizu when he saw the
Priestess getting upset. “Do tell me if your Tauk is able to
see their bodies float when they are weighed down by rock and
stone?”
She shook her
head, clasping her hands together. “It…it
doesn’t show me anything, Great Pharaoh.”
Atemu raised
his eyebrows. “What do you mean by that? You are not able to
use it anymore?”
“I…I
can’t,” she whispered, wringing her hands.
“It’s been like this for a while, Great Pharaoh. I
can barely catch a glimpse, and it’s more difficult than ever
to interpret the images.”
“What
have you been able to see?” Atemu demanded, standing up from
his Throne. Akunadin and Set both looked at Aishizu, curiosity and pity
mixed on their faces.
The Priestess
licked her lips before answering, anxiety audible in her voice.
“I
have seen nothing but darkness, disturbing images of blood and
despair,” she spoke, averting her head as Atemu walked
towards her. “Torture, fire…a disturbing future
that no one wants to be a part of…”
“Is
there a war coming?” Karim asked, keeping his voice low. Mana
couldn’t believe it. Pharaoh Akunamukanon had worked so hard
to bring this nation to peace, to have good alliances and relations
with their neighbor countries, and his son…his son was
plunging Khemet into an abyss of darkness, corrupted by his Item or not
- this had to stop. If the two Syrian delegates were truly dead, Syria
would demand an explanation, and if they weren’t satisfied
with the answer…wars had been started for less, and Khemet
was a great target for plundering and looting.
“Interesting,”
was all that Atemu said, standing still. He pretended to think for a
moment, then smiled and nodded to Aishizu. “We will have to
work very hard in the coming days. I have no doubt
some…things will escalate, and I really do not want those
images Aishizu saw to become true.”
The mad glint
in his eye belied his words, just as much as his voice; there
wasn’t a single shred of fear or worry in it. He’s
really going to start a war, and used poor Kisara as a pawn on a
chessboard. Mana refrained from growling. Her Master used to
point out that she more than once failed to see the bigger picture, but
this time she saw it, as clearly as if it was imprinted on her retinas.
He hadn’t killed Kisara to avoid any political conflict, but
to
start one. He was going to bring Khemet to its demise. …there
are certain events that are so drastic, so encompassing, that they
influence the Great Timeline after all. Epidemics, wars,
earthquakes… She shivered.
“Court
dismissed,” Atemu’s voice suddenly rang out and she
startled again. It dawned to her that she had been daydreaming and
apparently missed out on more information, as Aishizu seemed to have
calmed down and looked in front of her, composed as always.
“Aishizu,”
she latched onto the older woman, “Aishizu, wait!”
She turned
around. “Yes, Mana?”
“Was
that…was that all you saw?”
“Wasn’t
it enough?” she asked, surprisingly bitter.
“I’ve always been able to see several possible
futures, and the glimpses I caught were clear and peaceful - still
difficult to determine their meanings, but there was no blood, no
despair, no darkness! Since the…death of Kisara I
haven’t been able to see any glimpse at all. As if
there’s no future at all.”
Mana fell
silent. She tried to understand Aishizu’s words, comparing
them to what the other strange girl had said, about the timelines,
about how certain events were so drastic that they could even set off
the Great Timeline. She wanted to laugh, the notion too crazy for
words, and she looked over her shoulder to where Atemu was, catching
him pushing a servant rather brusquely out of his way who was about to
offer him some refreshments. The tray and goblets fell to the floor,
clattering. Aishizu hissed, the sounds hurting her ears.
“I
need to go lie down,” she said, voice wavering.
“Go
rest,” Mana urged her, knowing that everything had been said.
There was nothing more she could find in Atemu’s favor, no
matter how frantically she’d searched for that one little
thing, the tiniest hint of redemption. The Sennen Puzzle had corrupted
him, twisted the goodness in his heart to evil in his mind, uncaring,
unfazed, uninterested. Nothing, but absolutely nothing was left of the
young man she once knew, the boy she thought she knew…and
she realized that she couldn’t bring him back, not now, not
ever. Khemet was at the brink of an all-out war because of his actions,
he had estranged his Court, alienated his High Priest and everyone
around him.
Mana expected
to be called after, but nothing was said and she left the Throne Room,
her hands clenching at the fabric of her dress. The hooded cloak
weighed heavy on her shoulders; it hadn’t protected her from
the cold this time either. Cold, silent darkness…it seemed
to surround Atemu, to envelop him further each passing day. Not only
had his behavior started to reflect his personality, but also the
people around him were beginning to get affected. Mana had heard about
riots in the city, and even closer, small skirmishes between the
Palace’s personnel.
People reacted
more violently and aggravated to something small - a misunderstanding
or just simply bad luck - while the servants used to solve their own
problems with resignation, the origin of the problem often not worth
getting worked up over.
The lunches
with the Pharaoh and all his Priests together were also abandoned,
though Mana didn’t have any illusion of the tension that
would rise if everyone was together at the table. The atmosphere had
already been ruined, the former loyal bonds broken beyond repair. As
she hurried through the large hallway, Mana wondered if Set would be
able to kill his cousin and take his Throne, his Puzzle and all his
power for himself - or would he be corrupted by the Item as well? Maybe
he was already corrupted by the Rod, but had he been able to withstand
its influence?
“It’s
the Puzzle,” her own voice whispered into her ear, and the
Priestess flinched. Next to her was Mana, looking like an ordinary
servant to anyone else, but bearing the same face as the Priestess. She
was thankful that almost no one at the Palace had enough knowledge
about heka anymore to pick up on the
girl’s strong signature; that would bring more questions than
the Priestess possibly could answer.
“I’m
glad you’re back,” she said, honestly.
“We need to talk.”
“I
know a little of what happened. Kisara, right?”
“How…?”
“It’s
all right. I know how this era is supposed to be, and everything has
gone wrong so far. The course of events is throwing the Great Timeline
off.”
“Please,”
the Priestess whispered. “Let’s go to my
room.”
Mana nodded,
bowing and taking a little distance from the other woman. Not many
would think strange things of seeing the Priestess being so close with
a servant, but it would be frowned upon nonetheless. Servants were
treated fairly well, but not familiarly. Carrying some blankets and
other linen in her arms, Mana followed her alternate self to her room,
the large hallway seemingly unending. She heaved a soft sigh. It had
taken her some time to replenish her heka -
fortunately, not much time appeared to have passed here. She barely
recognized this Khemet, wondering not for the first or for the last
time how it could ever be possible that only one man could make such a
difference in the course of history, influencing the Great Timeline
itself. And to think it was Atemu…
Mana
didn’t allow herself enough time to ponder. There was work to
be done, and if she wanted to restore the timeline in the first place,
she had to take this decision and work together with the Mana of this
time, otherwise the world was doomed.
The Priestess
walked in front of her, opening the door as she soon as she reached it,
her movements frantic. She was upset and all but started to cry when
she was in her room. Mana wanted to take pity on herself and already
reached for the Priestess - but decided against it the last second, and
closed the door behind her.
“It
just can’t be like this,” the Priestess said.
“It’s nothing like I could’ve ever
imagined… have you seen him like this before?”
“Not
like this,” Mana shook her head, sending chestnut bangs
flying. “I’ve seen a lot of different worlds, and
not ever…have I seen him like this.”
“Is it the Item?”
She shook her
head again. “Not necessarily…not only the Item.
More events have led up to this, and…”
“Was
it Master leaving?”
“Mana,”
she said, tasting her own name on her tongue, “we
don’t have much time. If war breaks out before
we’re able to repair the timeline, all is lost.”
The Priestess
rubbed at her eyes, a bizarre expression of grief and anger on her
face. “If war breaks out, this world is doomed
anyway.”
“It’s
not like that. We can prevent the war, prevent bloodshed and the
downfall of this nation if we act fast…but I need your help,
Mana.”
“I’m…I’m
not going to kill him.”
Mana looked at
the Priestess, trying to remain calm and not let the pity for the woman
prevail. She had to do this, otherwise this world would be destroyed.
She had the opportunity to restore the timeline, allowing it to be
absorbed in the Great Timeline, and save Khemet, returning it to its
previous glory.
“I
will.”
“Wh…what?”
“I
will.” Mana looked at herself, the Priestess covered by her
robes, dabbing with a little piece of cloth at her tear-streaked
cheeks.
“It
can’t end like this,” she murmured. “The
Pharaoh…Atemu…”
“There’s
no more hope for him or for Khemet, the whole world, if we stand around
here any longer and allow the darkness to do its work and to throw
everything off balance even more,” Mana said. She swallowed.
“I’m not exactly happy with this
either…!”
The Priestess
threw the piece of cloth at the floor. She’d seen and heard
enough. If there really was no other option…the nation was a
small step away from an all-out war, and Atemu from being completely
absorbed by the evil shadows surrounding him…
“What
do I need to do?”
Mana squelched
the rest of her pity and remorse. This world needed to be saved,
nothing else. She would be saved in the end as well - she and all her
incarnations, if she did this just right. The Gods smiled upon her,
urging her on to do her work, because even they couldn’t stop
the course the events had taken, and they wouldn’t be served
if the nation was at war and suffered too many casualties. They would
be forgotten and abandoned, their shrines destroyed and their temples
ruined, all of the darkness in one man.
Mana had only
time to take a brief look at the mirror as she heard the knock on the
door. Her low-cut dress was nicely stressing her figure, and she tied
the folds of the fabric just below her breasts, boosting them up a
little. She accentuated her cleavage a little more by wearing one of
the golden necklaces he’d given her - back in the time he had
been gallant, kind and attentive…when he loved her for who
she was, and not for her body. She didn’t know whether to
detest herself or revel in the fact that he was coming to see her.
Tangling her fingers in her hair, Mana tried to refrain from crying.
Even now, even
at this very moment, as she had witnessed his crimes herself, she was
still thinking of how she could pleasure him, how his hands felt on her
body. No matter how little she meant to him, how it was only physical
contact and nothing more, she longed to feel him, to hold him, and to
kiss him. Maybe, just maybe, not all hope was lost. If he came to see
her, he still was interested in her, right? Maybe…
The doors were
opened and two guards entered the room before Atemu followed them. Mana
turned away from the mirror, quickly looking through her room to check
if she really had tidied up everything; after all, she’d held
onto her Master’s documents and papers, and it
wouldn’t do the situation much good if Atemu were to find
them.
He dismissed
the guards, not even taking one look at his Priestess. “What
is it that you had to send me that urgent message for?”
“It…it
has to do with what happened in the Throne Room,” Mana said,
taking a step towards him. She waited until the guards had left the
room before she reached for him, touching his elbow.
“Hm?
What do you mean?”
“Aishizu…and
her ability with the Tauk.” She searched for words.
“How she panicked in the Throne Room.”
“Such
behavior certainly was not fitting for someone of her
position,” Atemu said, his voice taking on a bored tone.
“She
predicted darkness and despair, Pha…Atemu.”
Now he looked
at her, a small smile tugging at his lips. For some reason he liked
hearing her speak his name, but she couldn’t figure out why. Was
it… a faint glimmer of hope…
because deep down he cares for me? She knew what fate was
awaiting him, and she knew she was lending it a little hand.
Hesitating, she took another step closer, feeling nervous. She
couldn’t go through with this. She
couldn’t….Mana mustered up a smile, albeit a shaky
one.
“It
has to mean something,” she said. “Darkness and
despair, Atemu. Your father worked so hard to bring peace to this
nation, to make Khemet to a safe haven for everyone, embracing
different cultures…”
“My
father is dead,” Atemu interrupted her. “He has
been dead for years now, and I have followed long enough in his
footsteps. It is time that I took the path that was laid out for me. I
have been ignoring my true calling for far too long.”
“T-true
calling?” She forced herself to come closer, feeling her
heart plunge when he looked away from her again, even turning a little.
Her hand was still on his elbow, and her fingers slipped from his skin.
Atemu was staring out the window, the curtains billowing in the
afternoon wind. She had especially chosen for this room because of the
large window; not only was it a source of light during the day, it also
offered a spectacular view of the gardens.
She often had
stood in front of the window, pondering about things - she
couldn’t recall the last time when she had purely enjoyed the
view.
“You
were talking about your true calling,” she said as she moved
closer to him again, coming to stand next to him, placing a hand on his
shoulder. She had never done this before; it had always been Atemu who
took the initiative. He still didn’t look at her, as if he
couldn’t care less for her touch. Was it too late?
“My
true calling,” he repeated. “You will learn more
about it soon enough, Mana. I am very busy at this
moment…learning this calling on my own, studying the paths I
have to take, preparing for what is about to come.” War.
She swallowed,
tasting bile rising up in her throat.
“I
know you’re very busy. I appreciate it that you came to see
me so soon,” she whispered in his ear, moving so close that
her breasts bumped into his back. That caught at least his attention,
and he craned his neck to look at her.
“You
are very special, Mana, you know that,” he said. Her smile
was dazzling brilliant. I want to believe it. He says so
himself.
“Yes,
I know,” the words rolled over her lips by themselves. She
leaned up to capture his lips and rejoiced when he returned the kiss,
but only that - he didn’t wrap his arms around her,
didn’t make another move. It was frustrating; he’d
never hesitated or dallied before. She was here, all but offering him
every chance and opportunity, and this time, the most important time,
he was showing barely any interest. She drew out the kiss as long as
possible, quickly latching onto his lips again after she took a deep
breath. She had to appear not too eager, not too desperate - she only
had to comfort him, make him feel at ease. Mana moved her hand up,
towards his neck. It wasn’t that difficult to notice that he
was tense; she broke up the kiss again, showing him a warm smile.
“You’re
very special too,” she said, and she meant it. Atemu tilted
his head, almost curiously.
“How
long have we been together?”
“As long as I can remember,” she answered, for that was the simple truth to her. Being brought to the Royal Palace by her parents who she had never seen again, she was raised and educated here - along with Atemu and Mahaado, until he was accepted into Priesthood.
Finally, his
hands rested on her hips. Despite aging, she hadn’t grown
much in height, just like Atemu. They were at equal eye level, and she
stared right at his dark red eyes, narrow eyes, empty eyes. There was
no love, no compassion, no kindness in those shallow, hollow windows of
his soul.
Suppressing a
shiver, she kissed him again, heaving a soft sigh as she felt his hand
traveling up her body, towards her breast. Her hands fumbled close to
his neck, where the fastenings of his cloak were. Without a sound, she
undid the fastenings and gathered the fabric, dropping it over a stool
next to her. She placed her hands back on his chest, fingers trailing
the cord of the Sennen Puzzle, waiting for him to put his hand over
her. This time she wasn’t disappointed; Atemu put his hand
over hers, his fingers touching the cord. He was going to take it off
himself, not allowing anyone else to come close to it; and that was the
moment she had been waiting for.
He turned
around, slipping the cord over his head, cupping the Item with his
other hand to place it upon the stool where his cloak already was put
upon. The Priestess held her breath as she stepped away from him as
silently as she could, while the other Mana took her place. Atemu was
standing with his back to her, carefully tucking the Item in the folds
of his cloak. It was almost endearing if it wasn’t for the
serious nature of the situation; she never had seen him this dependant
on his Item. She knew the history of the Items, a history she
couldn’t divulge if she didn’t want this timeline
to be even worse off. It had to happen now…now or never, and
if it never happened, she would condemn this world to total
destruction. Atemu moved his hands up, searching for the clasps of the
broad, golden collar around his neck.
“Let
me help you.”
With a quick
snap, she unfastened the collar and took the jewelry away, putting it
on the stool as well. He turned around, eyes briefly darting over her,
lingering around her chest area. Mana was similarly dressed as the
other Mana of course, and she felt extremely self-conscious. She had
worn short skirts and rather revealing dresses before, young as she
was, but her taste in clothing had developed into a more conservative
look over time. Standing in front of him, to be exposed completely if
only he undid the knot just below her breasts…it made her
breath quicken. With one tug, he could undress her, the fabric pooling
around her ankles in one whim.
She breathed a
little nervously as he moved his hand, but he didn’t touch
the knot. His fingers traced the golden necklace, its intricate design
resembling falling leaves. It contrasted with her tan skin, the lapis
lazuli and gemstones accentuating her collar bones. It was a small
fortune resting around her neck, and he had given it to her. No,
not to me. The other Mana. The Mana of this time, who is a Priestess
and heartbroken.
He kissed her,
and her world seemed to shatter. It was a small kiss, just a kiss, but
it was
a kiss. All her life, she had wanted to kiss him. She had even prayed
for it - prayed that he would look her way, prayed that the smile he
send her meant just more than a smile. Atemu never had made her feel
like a servant or an apprentice, he had always been her friend and her
support. He had listened to her, laughed with her, joked around with
her by hiding in large vases, tricking especially Mahaado into
searching for them. He shared her sadness as she was wondering about
where her parents were or why they abandoned her; he listened stoically
to her temper tantrums if something went wrong and encouraged her when
she tried to conjure a particularly difficult spell.
This
kiss…this was the kiss she longed for. She knew what awaited
Atemu in every incarnation and in every reality, and she knew he
wasn’t destined to become her lover. They would never kiss,
never touch, never hold each other like that, and
it had taken her ages to realize it and accept it. She had fantasized
about a kiss from her best friend but had left it at that, knowing that
the social gap between them was too big. He was a Pharaoh, a God, and
she was just an apprentice, on her way to become a magician, maybe a
Priestess. No matter their friendship, it just wouldn’t
happen. Now she had the chance to touch and brush his
lips…for the first, and for the last, time in her life. Mana
had imagined it would be sweet, and gentle, something to enjoy -
certainly not hard, rushed, impersonal, bored. He
wasn’t feeling a thing for her; she was nothing but a
convenient body, at his disposal whenever he wanted to satisfy his
desires. She, just like her counterpart, refused to believe it; she
simply couldn’t believe it. This was Atemu, the Pharaoh of
Khemet, who had plucked plums for her in the garden. It
just…wasn’t right.
She wanted to
cry, but she found she couldn’t. Her hand was moving towards
her back, slipping between the folds of her dress. Her lips were still
latched onto his and she keened low in her throat as he broke up the
kiss, only to gasp when he attacked her neck. Tilting her head in
response, exposing more skin, she used the swaying movement of her body
to slip a magical dagger from the folds of her robe, wrapping her
fingers around the handle. It burned, deep inside, the knowledge of
what she was about to do and the sensations of the kisses, his
ministrations, the responses of her body.
It was a life
she was going to take, no matter how corrupted he had become. It
wasn’t his fault. That damned Item. Damned Fate! His
breath was hot against her neck as he continued to kiss and lick the
skin, sending shivers down her spine. She almost lost her grip on the
dagger’s handle and she whimpered. She had longed to be in
his arms. All these times, all these alternate realities, she had
wanted nothing but to be in his arms, if only for a moment. One hand
was on her hip, his other hand moved up towards her breast, fingers
darting over the thin fabric, creeping towards the knot.
“Mana,”
he breathed, and his fingers plucked at the knot that held up her
dress. She had taken great care in wrapping the fabric so she could
hide the dagger from view, tying it exactly so that it would stress the
curves of her body, ending up in front, just below her breasts to give
them a little boost…she was attractive, pretty even, in that
dress with the beautiful golden necklace, maybe even worthy of a
Queen…but this wasn’t her Pharaoh. This was
another man, some kind of monster, unlike the Atemu she knew and had
known. He had killed, he was going to wage war…and all
because of an anomaly in time. Master.
She understood at that very moment how Mahaado must’ve felt
and she almost choked, biting back a sob.
“Mana,”
he repeated, breathing more erratic, and he was about to take another
breath when she struck. The magic dagger pierced his chest, sharp blade
cutting through flesh and muscle, finding its way to his heart.
Atemu’s lustful whisper turned into a stunned gasp, his eyes
growing wide as the realization of pain settled in.
“M-Mana…”
Tears were
running over her cheeks, but she didn’t sense them. Her
vision was blurred from the tears, but his expression was painfully
sharp to see, imprinting on her mind. Disbelief, pain,
shock…she parted her lips to scream his name, but she
couldn’t find her voice, just as she couldn’t find
the strength to grab his shenti, to keep him upright. Instead, she let
him go, her heart breaking, shattering into a million piedces as his
questioning, confused eyes remained focused on her face as death
settled in.
He was dead
before his body hit the floor, eyes glazing over during his fall, lips
parted in surprise. Only a small amount of blood was visible on his
chest, coloring his shenti a dark red. The magic dagger protruded from
his body, blade covered in blood. A yellowish blue light started to
shine, and Mana forced herself to concentrate, sobbing out loud a few
times before she knelt next to the lifeless Pharaoh and grabbed the
handle of the dagger to pull it out.
“Forgive
me,” was all that she said, and tried to avoid a fresh wave
of tears. His soul was already escaping; there was no time for tears
and sorry goodbyes. Mana turned around on her knees and grabbed the
Sennen Puzzle from the stool. Quickly, she cast the spell to trap
Atemu’s soul and guided it into the Puzzle, yelping out in
surprise as it shattered once she was finished. Gods!
Surrounded by
the many pieces of the Puzzle, she leaned forward, supporting herself
as she was kneeling, rocking back and forth as the tears streamed. Her
mind replayed the events again and again, and she knew the confused,
hurt look in his eyes as he died would haunt her for the rest of her
life. Realizing she was still holding the dagger, she dropped it to the
floor as if she burned herself. Her fingers felt cramped, her body
tense and she hurt all over. Huddling into herself, it was hard to
regain control over her breathing again. Her cheeks were wet, and tears
dripped on her beautiful dress, blotting the fabric.
“You…you
did it,” the Priestess was close to her, and Mana
hadn’t noticed that she’d approached her.
“He…he’s dead.”
“I…”
She couldn’t speak. Voice hitching, she started to bawl. The
dark soul already present in the Puzzle was scattered along with it,
along with Atemu’s soul, scattered on a plane of existence
almost no one was aware of. Three millennia would await them in which
he would forget, and the darkness would brood to strike at him as soon
as it would get the chance. When a boy, engrossed in games and puzzles,
would piece it together and inherit the Pharaoh’s soul and
become friends with him, searching for his lost memories.
Mana composed
herself, using a corner of the dress to rub at her face. The Priestess
had put a hand on her shoulder as a way to comfort her, but the other
woman bore the same heartbroken, sad and grievous look on her face.
Mana leaned forward and closed Atemu’s eyes, her touch as
gentle as possible. In death, he looked like the Atemu she knew and
loved - his face serene, lips slightly parted, the man who had followed
justice and peace for so long.
“What…what
now?” The Pharaoh is dead. He’s dead!
Atemu…
The Priestess
pressed the palms of her hands against her eyes to keep from crying.
Her whole body trembled, and she avoided looking at Atemu on the floor.
Mana got back up on her feet, using the stool as a support. She
wasn’t going to tell her namesake about Mahaado and how he
would kill his counterpart. The Mahaado of this time would pay dearly
for his decision to run away from the Palace, afraid of dying - but he would
die, and he would still vow the same oath as he had always done. His
soul would be the Pharaoh’s eternal servant, and there was
nothing, not even the Great Timeline itself, that changed that.
“Atemu
is safe now, Khemet is safe. Set will ascend to the Throne.”
The other Priests were supposed to die as well in their fight against
the darkness, but their fate wasn’t a great influence on the
timeline, unlike Atemu’s.
“There
won’t be a war,” Mana said and the Priestess
nodded, relieved. “Your soul will be bound to your
kaa, just like Mahaado’s.”
“Does
that mean I have to die now too?”
“No,
not now,” Mana shook her head. “Don’t be
afraid. When your time is there, you won’t notice a
thing…and remember, you will see your Pharaoh again, though
he will not remember you.”
“I’ll
see him again?” the Priestess asked hopefully.
“Yes,
don’t worry,” Mana said. “No one will
connect you to his death either - leave everything as it is and call
for the guards. They’ll see the shattered Puzzle and will
think that he died from the influence of the Item.”
“What
about the Puzzle…?”
“See
to it that the pieces are collected and put into a box. A golden
rectangular box. As you’ll collect the pieces,
you’ll know what text to put on the box. Make sure that
it’ll be interred with him. It will be discovered three
millennia from now.”
“Unbelievable,”
the Priestess said. “By the Gods…what have we both
done?”
“We
have saved this world,” Mana said, but she didn’t
sound victorious or joyous at all. The world was saved, which meant
that it would be absorbed by the Great Timeline, dissolving into the
other timelines. They had corrected a flaw, a mistake…but
this world wouldn’t go under, it would live. The Puzzle would
be discovered by Mutou Sugoroku, as the Ring would end up in the hands
of Bakura Ryou, and then the fate of the world would be again at stake.
But then, the Pharaoh would be there to save it, instead of destroy it.
Mana felt that
there wasn’t much time left. Her heka was
depleting again, and she needed to instruct the Priestess. In short
sentences, she instructed the woman to secure the Ceremonial Tablets
from Atemu’s youth, and to go search for a young man from a
tribe called Ishtar, living outside the city walls.
The Priestess
didn’t ask questions anymore. She felt herself calming down,
reconciliation settling into her very soul. Maybe I just knew
all along that this would happen.
Something had felt so terribly wrong for so long now. Atemu was at
rest, and memories of him would fade, leaving only the mementos from
his youth instead of his harsh actions in his adult years. In a way,
she felt grateful - she could barely live with the memories she had of
him now, let alone a whole nation. He had been kind and
loving…one day. And one day, he would be kind and loving
again - and if he didn’t remember her, so be it. She could
always try again, couldn’t she?
“The
portal,” Mana whispered. “I have to go
now.”
The Priestess
nodded, clasping her hands together. Mana mimicked the movement.
“Thank
you.”
“Thank
you, too…”
“Go,”
the Priestess urged her namesake. “Go with the grace of the
Gods.”
Mana showed a
small smile, knowing that she meant well. The Priestess was going to
face a difficult time as it was, and it wouldn’t take long
for her to find consolation with her inner kaa. Black
Magician Girl.
Her smile faded into a sad grimace, though the other Mana
couldn’t see it anymore. They both weren’t girls
anymore; they’d been through too much to be girls any longer.
The portal closed around her, and Mana was taken away from the world of
Khemet for good. It was safe now. As she was pulled back to the reality
she came from, fresh tears spilled from her eyes. No matter that the
whole world was a little safer; she couldn’t forget the look
in his eyes. She had received her first kiss from him, and it had been
heaven and hell at the same time. A thousand worlds caught in one kiss,
and she had destroyed it.
End
of this timeline
Timeline
II, Alternative Universe: Domino City, Japan
With his last
strength, Jounouchi rang the doorbell. There was someone at home as
several windows were lit; Jounouchi would even settle for talking to
Yuugi’s grandfather, if only they were let into the house.
The door was
opened, and Yuugi looked up in surprised at his visitors.
“Jounouchi-kun!
What…”
“Quick,
let us in!”
“Of
course, come in! What happened? Who is…?”
“This
is my sister, Shizuka,” Jounouchi said, almost pushing Yuugi
out of the way in his haste to get inside. Yuugi stepped aside, staring
after Jounouchi.
“Close
the door!”
Baffled, Yuugi
did as he was told, his mind racing. “Jounouchi-kun, would
you mind telling me…”
“Who
are these late guests, Yuugi-chan?”
Yuugi cringed
from his mother’s voice as she used the terribly affectionate
suffix for his name, but neither Jounouchi nor Shizuka paid any
attention to it.
“Jounouchi-kun
and his sister,” he said. “I think something
happened…”
“I
think so too,” the woman nodded, putting her hand on
Shizuka’s shoulder. The girl flinched and started to cry all
over again. “She’s clearly upset, the poor
thing…come with me, I’ll get you some
tea.”
She
didn’t even protest as Yuugi’s mother calmly talked
to her, soothing her shot nerves, and gently leading her to the warm
kitchen for the aforementioned tea. Jounouchi in the meantime had
regained his breath, and the look he threw at Yuugi was almost
accusatory.
“Would
you mind telling me what’s going on?” Yuugi asked.
“You look like you’ve been running from
ghosts…”
“Not
ghosts, murderers,” he said, keeping his voice low, then
forcefully bit his own lip. He was not going to cry
himself - for watching Otogi die, for endangering his sister, for doing
everything wrong. He raked a hand through his hair, obviously at his
wit’s end.
“Let’s
go upstairs too,” Yuugi said. “Kaa-san and
Shizuka-chan are in the kitchen, and jii-chan is in the living
room…we can talk in my room.”
Jounouchi
wordlessly agreed and followed Yuugi up the stairs, to his bedroom in
the attic. It was a rather spacious room, painted in sky blue and light
gray colors, two bookcases full with games, a bed and a desk with a
chair. Yuugi flopped on the bed, leaving the only chair in the room for
Jounouchi to sit on, and he pulled it towards him to sit down.
“What
happened?”
“Otogi
was killed right in front of my eyes,” Jounouchi mumbled.
“Otogi?
Otogi Ryuuji? How…that’s horrible! Were you
robbed? Who attacked you?”
“Bakura
and some guy named Malik,” Jounouchi said. He shook his head
as if he could straighten out his jumbled thoughts that way. He should
be at the police station, reporting the murder, describing Bakura,
having him arrested…but this hadn’t been his
classmate. This had been someone else, a monster, a demon, a devil.
“No.
The Master of Shadows.”
“Holy
crap!” Jounouchi fell from his chair, totally taken by
surprise as he saw Mahaado standing in front of him, Mana on his left
side. The girl looked disturbed, her face pale and blank.
“I’m
sorry Jounouchi-kun,” Yuugi said a little sheepishly.
“I tried to catch your attention, but you were so lost in
thought and mumbling out loud that you didn’t notice
them…”
“This
won’t end!” Jounouchi cried out loud.
“What the hell’s going on? I can’t take
it anymore! My sister…”
“Apprentice,”
Mahaado said and the girl nodded, leaving the room immediately. The
tall man sat down on the bed, Yuugi looking up at him as if he was
welcoming an old friend back. Mahaado carefully arranged his flowing
robes, ironing out the folds.
“The
Master of Shadows,” Jounouchi repeated. “What fun,
he’s a classmate of mine.”
“Bakura
of Darkness is not your classmate. What you saw was the parasite in his
body, the entity leeching off his energy and strength. Without his
Host, Bakura of Darkness is nothing.”
“He
said something about Master Host…he and that other creepy
guy.”
“Other
creepy guy? Jounouchi, you should go to the
police…”
“Police?”
Jounouchi repeated, his voice shrill. “Do you really think
they’d believe me?”
Mahaado shook
his head. “There is no force able to stop Bakura of Darkness
but the Pharaoh,” he said. “It was his fate to meet
him and defeat him.”
“The
Pharaoh…the Puzzle dude?”
“Please
refer to him as…well, it does not matter anymore.”
Mahaado folded his hands. "Bakura of Darkness has manifested himself,
along with Malik of Darkness. I had hoped there was more time, but fate
has turned itself against this world. I was able to save you from both,
Jounouchi, by summoning my spirit monster - but soon enough, even my
strongest magic will not be able to do anything against the darkness
those two will bring onto this world.”
“Mahaado,”
Yuugi said, voice pleading. “There must be something we can
do. I called the school janitor, and he told me he’d never
found something as the missing puzzle piece during his cleaning of the
swimming pool, but there’s someone else who would.”
“And
who would that be?”
Yuugi turned
red, lowering his head. “Ushio.”
As Jounouchi
visibly swallowed and shifted nervously around on his seat, Mahaado
quirked his eyebrow.
“Who
is this Ushio? He seems to provoke a rather…stressful
reaction.”
“Ushio
is one of the hall monitors at school,” Jounouchi explained,
feeling sick to his stomach. “He makes all the rules, and
even the teachers are too afraid to stand up against him.”
“And
how exactly would he be the one knowing about the missing piece of the
Puzzle?”
“He
knows about everything that’s going around school,”
Jounouchi muttered. “He’s a veritable
tyrant.”
“I…I could simply call him and ask if he’d ever seen something like the missing piece,”
Yuugi offered,
though his voice lacked any enthusiasm. Jounouchi shivered, not only
from the thought of Ushio. Otogi dying, being killed in front of him,
his panicked sister…he would never be able to shake these
images for the rest of his life.
“What
the hell is going on…” he whispered.
“Just what the hell is going on?”
“This
world is coming to an end,” Mahaado answered after a few
minutes of silence. “The forces of Shadow are already at
work, and there is no counterbalance to their power. You alone are not
able to defeat it. We need the Pharaoh, only he is capable of stopping
them.”
“Isn’t
there any other way to…call him?” Yuugi asked.
“No,
his soul is trapped within the Sennen Puzzle, and only solving the
Puzzle will release it to join with yours, Prince,” Mahaado
said. “I am very sorry. This timeline is too greatly
disrupted to be a part of the Great Timeline anymore. It cannot be
restored.”
“Now
wait a minute,” Jounouchi hissed. “That
can’t be all my fault! Just because of such a little puzzle
piece?”
“There
are many forces at work,” Mahaado answered him calmly.
“You eliminated the force that was supposed to counterattack
it, and yes, simply because of such a little puzzle piece. If you had
never thrown it away, Prince had been able to solve the Puzzle, thus
releasing the Pharaoh’s soul.”
“Wait,
wait,” Yuugi said. “What if I call Ushio now and
ask him about it? If he has the missing piece and I complete the Puzzle
still?”
“It
is too late,” Mahaado gravely spoke. “Malik of
Darkness already arrived. He is another key figure in the battle that
should have awaited the Pharaoh - but with him missing, the darkness
inside Malik Ishtar has become his dominant personality, just like
Bakura.”
“You
mean…there are more of these Master Host things?”
The tall man
pursed his lips, a momentary look of pity on his face, before he
resumed talking.
“It
is too complicated to explain right now, and it defeats the purpose.
With the death of Pegasus J. Crawford, Duelist Kingdom never came to
pass, and now the Battle City tournament will never be organized,
because the preceding events never took place.”
“Duelist
Kingdom…tournament…I don’t
understand…”
“Prince,
you would have understood if the events had unfolded in the right
chronology,” Mahaado said and stood up from the bed.
“There is no point in explaining now. Like I said before,
this timeline is too far disrupted to be restored. I am sorry. There is
nothing I can do for you now.”
“Master,”
said a soft voice close to the door.
“I
know, Apprentice.”
“Where
are you going to?” Jounouchi shot up from his seat as Mahaado
turned to leave. The door widened, and Shizuka entered, holding
Mana’s hand.
“Onii-chan,”
she whispered. She looked calmed down and he closed the distance
between them, taking his sister into his arms. She’d been in
the shower; her hair was still damp, and she wore a different dress
than before. Her cheeks were a little rosy and she trembled a little.
“Sit
down,” Jounouchi coaxed her, and she meekly sat down, her
eyes staring at Yuugi, whose reddened cheeks seem to color even more.
He didn’t know about her disability and thought she was
simply staring at him, averting his head a little.
Mana had taken
Mahaado’s side, standing on his right, compassion on her
face. Her eyes ware far too old for a girl looking this young; had she
seen more worlds end like this? It just simply couldn’t end
like this…
“Where
are you going to?” Jounouchi asked again, voice less
demanding. Shizuka tightened her grip on his arm.
“There
is nothing we can do,” Mahaado answered him. “We
leave. We have other timelines to restore - timelines who do have a
chance to fit into the Great Timeline. This is hopeless.”
“You
can’t leave like this, please,” Shizuka suddenly
spoke up, her voice pleading. Jounouchi was surprised by her words -
judging from the way she spoke, she knew everything. He assumed Mana
had told her, and his guilt almost ate him up alive. It all had started
with him taking that piece of the Puzzle away…
“I
am very sorry,” Mahaado repeated. “You all have my
deepest sympathies, but that is not much of a consolation. This world
is doomed.”
“You
have magic powers,” Shizuka insisted. “You both
travel through worlds and timelines, you see what
happens…”
“Yes,”
Jounouchi said. “Yes, you travel through timelines! Take us
with you!”
“It
does not work that way,” Mahaado refused. “We
cannot bring you to another world. Not only can I not provide enough
magic to open a portal to you all, we’d also bring foreign
elements in another timeline, thereby distorting events and causing
damage. We are here to repair and restore, not to shift around elements
and endanger other timelines.”
“Please,
take at least my sister with you,” Jounouchi said. He
couldn’t care less about himself. He wanted to make up for
the guilt eating at him, gnawing at his heart and soul.
If Shizuka is safe, not everything is lost.
“I
am sorry. Even though your sister does not contribute to the timeline,
bringing her into another timeline would set events off that could have
unforeseen consequences. I am not going to take that risk.”
“What…I
don’t contribute to the timeline?” Shizuka looked
confused and hurt for a moment. “But
onii-chan…”
“Are
you telling me my sister is expendable?” Jounouchi all but
yelled. Mahaado narrowed his eyes, this time looking impatient.
“You
are all expendable,” he said, raising his
voice. “The Puzzle came to Domino as it was supposed to. That
means that all the events in Ancient Egypt, where the
Pharaoh’s soul had to be sealed into the Item, have taken
place according to the Great Timeline. It got disrupted in Domino,
right here, when the Puzzle was not completed. Now that the
Pharaoh’s soul has not been released, he is unable to protect
you from what is to come. His task was to save this world from darkness
and destruction. Even if you were able to complete the Puzzle now, you
would be too late.”
“It’s
never too late!” Yuugi protested. “Please, we can
do something to make it stop!”
“This
world is doomed,” Mahaado repeated. “The process
cannot be reversed. I bid you farewell. We cannot uphold our presence
that much longer.”
“What
is going to happen next?” Shizuka said, her voice wavering.
Mana looked up at her Master as well, her eyes betraying that she
already knew the answer.
“I
will not let this world fall to darkness,” Mahaado replied.
“I will end this timeline before the forces of the shadows
will obtain full power.”
“Murderer,”
Jounouchi hissed.
“Onii-chan…is
he going to…?”
“As
little consolation as it is…I know how you feel.”
Mahaado didn’t elaborate, but nodded at Jounouchi.
“You will know no pain or despair.”
“Wow,
great!” Jounouchi yelled after him as the magician went
through the door, not even waiting for Mana. The girl looked at Yuugi
and then made a curtsy for him. She was out of the room before anyone
of them could say a thing. Shizuka turned her head towards Jounouchi,
her lips parted in an unasked question.
“They
just leave like that,” he said, baffled. Yuugi slid off of
his bed, putting on his house slippers. “What are you
going to do?”
“We
can try to find the missing piece of the Puzzle,” Yuugi said,
frowning. His face was set in determination. “I’ll
call Ushio right now. You just wait here.”
“Heh,
as if we have somewhere to go to,” Jounouchi replied. He
moved his hand up to brush a few wayward strands out of
Shizuka’s hair.
“What
about kaa-san and tou-san…”
“If
this timeline truly ends…”
“Onii-chan…”
“Hm?”
Again that
unasked question, and he knew what she wanted to ask but
didn’t say out loud. Why the fucking hell did you
throw that piece away?
He knew why she didn’t ask it out loud. She already knew that
he didn’t have an answer to it, and any answer would be a
moot point anyway.
No matter how
late it was, almost close to midnight, Yuugi had insisted he could do
this alone. “You and your sister have been through too much
already,” he’d said when Jounouchi overheard him
talking to Ushio on the phone. Apparently the hall monitor had seen the
missing piece of the Puzzle - more so, he had it into his
possession, and no, he didn’t think it was strange
that Yuugi was all but desperate to come see it, even at this time of
night.
“I
don’t want you to go alone,” Jounouchi had
insisted. He knew he was too late in making up for everything
he’d done, but he didn’t want to watch idly how
this world was coming to an end, and how even more people were going to
end up hurt because of him. He asked Yuugi’s permission to
call his friend Honda, and Shizuka had insisted on going with him.
“We don’t know how much more time we
have,” she said. “I don’t want to be
another second away from you, onii-chan.”
As they were
on their way to Ushio’s house, Honda was completely brought
up-to-date on the situation, balling his fists as he heard about Otogi.
“Damn!
These guys deserve to be punished, the murderers!”
“They
will be,” Yuugi answered. “When Mahaado ends this
timeline, they will cease to exist too.”
“How
can you be so calm about this?” Honda exclaimed.
“There’s
nothing more we can do but to complete the Puzzle and see what
happens,” Yuugi said, pointing at the object dangling from a
rope around his neck. “Mahaado was quite adamant about it
being too late, but maybe we can reverse the event before…it
really is too late. I’m sure that when the Puzzle is
completed, we have more chance of succeeding.”
“Hm,”
was all that Honda said. He was holding Shizuka’s hand while
she held onto Jounouchi’s. He didn’t know where her
cane was and he assumed that she had lost it during their confrontation
with Bakura and Malik. As long as he warned her in time for any
irregularities on the pavement, she went along with them just fine,
even though fatigue showed on her face. It all didn’t matter
much anymore. It all didn’t matter much anymore.
Jounouchi didn’t even try anymore to squelch his feelings of
guilt and misery.
“Damn
that Ushio,” Honda shivered. He and Jounouchi had bumped into
the immensely tall hall monitor before, and barely survived to tell
about it. The guy was a freak; everybody knew he carried a knife around
because of all the enemies he’d made, even though no one
dared to stand up against him.
“I
wonder why he doesn’t mind seeing us,” Jounouchi
muttered. “He won’t be giving us the piece back
from the goodness of his heart.”
“Maybe
if he hears our story, he’ll give it to us,” Yuugi
said good-naturedly. Jounouchi would have howled with laughter before
at this kind of comment, but for some reason Yuugi’s optimism
was comforting.
“Yeah,
maybe he will,” he even said and fell silent as they
approached the building where Ushio was living. Yuugi rang the bell,
and the door to the building was buzzed open.
“Fourth
floor,” he said and they used the elevator for the way up,
Shizuka tucked in between Honda and Jounouchi, leaning on the latter.
The building
was quite neat and well-maintained, and Yuugi pushed the door open to
the large hallway. Ushio was waiting for them already, lifting up his
hand at the door of his apartment.
“Way
too friendly,” Jounouchi whispered before they reached Ushio,
who was wearing a wide grin. Honda gritted his teeth. If he hated
something, it was being helpless, or even more, dependent - Ushio knew
exactly that he held a major advantage and the best stakes of the
negotiations.
“Come
in, come in,” he practically sing-songed. “Yuugi,
so good to see you. It was a sad day when you left the school. Bullies
are such a big problem! But oh - what do I see here? You are with
your bullies? Tsk, tsk!”
“Ushio-san,
please,” Yuugi asked. “We’ve come here to
see the piece of the Puzzle…do you have it,
please?”
“Of
course I do!” Ushio’s eyes traveled over Shizuka,
not understanding why the girl was here, but dismissed her from his
thoughts the next second. “I always oversee the cleaning of
the school’s swimming pool. You never know how lazy those
pool boys are until you see them
‘work’…and I can’t have my
fellow students swim around in an unhygienic pool now, can I?”
“Ushio-san…”
Yuugi said again.
“My
my…all right, here you are.” Ushio opened his
large left hand, showing the center piece of the Sennen Puzzle, the
all-too-familiar eye showing up front. Yuugi clasped his hands
together, heaving a loud sigh of relief. Then, he reached for the
piece…to which Ushio immediately closed his hand and
withdrew it, out of Yuugi’s reach.
“Two
hundred thousand yen.”
“Wh…what?”
“Two
hundred thousand yen.” Ushio showed a cunning grin.
“Nothing in life comes for free, little Yuugi. I’ve
done such a good job of watching after this priceless piece. I knew
someone would come for it sooner or later, so I took great care of it.
You wouldn’t want my efforts go without a reward, now do
you?”
“Ushio-san,
it’s important we have the piece now! You can get your money
later!” Yuugi pleaded.
“It’s
important, Ushio! The end of the world depends on it!”
Jounouchi blurted out.
“Ushio-san,
please!” Shizuka followed suit.
He bursted out
laughing. “Oh, but this is great! This is excellent!”
The next second, he lashed out, punching Yuugi square in the stomach.
“What kind of fool do you think I am? I want to see the money
first!”
“Bastard!”
Jounouchi saw Yuugi flying through the living room, the force of the
punch throwing him a meter away, grunting in pain.
Honda balled
his fists. “That piece is important, man! We’ll
bring you your money later!”
“Two
hundred thousand yen, and not a moment sooner,” Ushio barked.
“You
don’t understand - there’s no time
for that! Give up the piece!” Jounouchi lunged for Ushio,
hands outstretched to grab the other’s hand.
“Jounouchi-kun!”
Yuugi coughed, trying to get up again. Honda installed Shizuka in a
chair first before following his friend, attacking the hall monitor
with both his fists balled.
They proved to
be hardly a match, and it was purely their willpower to attack Ushio
again and again, as the other used his sheer physical force to throw
them away from him, hitting and punching. Yuugi still lied on the
floor, recovering from the earlier blows. He hated how powerless he
was, unable to do anything against Ushio’s strength, and his
eyes fell on the incomplete Puzzle. This world is doomed. As
if Mahaado was standing next to him and repeating it again. It
can’t be! It really can’t be…
Jounouchi hung
on Ushio’s arm, mustering up all his courage and strength and
bit him on the hand, teeth sinking in the flesh. As he cried out in
pain, the hall monitor opened his hand, and Jounouchi pried the golden
piece from his fingers, chucking it towards Yuugi.
“Here!
Catch!”
Enraged, Ushio
threw him to the floor, sending Honda in a heap next to him, using both
his feet and hands to beat them mercilessly. Shizuka, unable to do
anything, called for her brother and for Honda, panicked.
Yuugi
didn’t catch the piece, but it was thrown in his direction
and it fell to the floor in front of him. Groaning from the pain, Yuugi
dragged himself over the floor to grab the piece, his fingers closing
around it.
“Please.
Please!” He thought to himself as he
pressed it in the Puzzle, hearing a loud ‘click’.
A bright light
emitted and he closed his eyes, a wave of nausea engulfing him, his
head seeming to split in two, pain and more pain, and he
wasn’t himself anymore, he saw darkness and light and he felt
anger and comfort at the same time and then there was nothing more.
When Yuugi
opened his eyes again, he saw Ushio lying on the floor, his hands
furiously rummaging through a bag of garbage, throwing everything
around himself. He was in the greatest ecstasy as Yuugi had ever seen
someone before; he kept yelling “Money! This is great!
There’s money everywhere!”
“Ushio-san?”
“Don’t
bother, Yuugi,” Jounouchi said. He looked horrible, he knew
it - his eyes were half closed, his cheek was swollen, and he tasted
blood in his mouth. Honda didn’t look any better, but he had
a content grin on his face as he looked at the hall monitor reduced to
child-like glee while he dug in the trash.
“What…what
happened?” Yuugi finally got up from the floor, blinking a
few times. He really couldn’t recall the last few minutes,
and Ushio had been his brutal, beating self before he blacked out.
“We
saw the Pharaoh,” Jounouchi said while he forced himself to
get back on his feet as well, using Honda as support before offering
him a helping hand. “He played a game with dear Ushio over
there. A batsu game, and Ushio lost. He was
punished.”
“Eh?
You saw…” Yuugi looked down at his completed
Puzzle and suddenly smiled. “So Mahaado was right!”
“Right
all the way,” Honda said, turning around to lift Shizuka up
and wrapped and arm around her as she clung to Jounouchi, keeping the
girl comfortably close in-between the two of them.
“Man,
these Darknesses or entities or whatever they are, are pretty
creepy,” Jounouchi said, lisping a little. It felt like his
jaw was broken and all his teeth had been rearranged in the most
painful way possible. “Though I wouldn’t hesitate
for a second to team up with yours, Yuugi. He’s powerful,
that’s for sure.”
Yuugi simply
nodded, unable to say anything in return. Even the power of the Pharaoh
was probably not enough to stop the process and save the world this
time. As Mahaado had said, too many disruptions…
“Must
we say Pharaoh to you now?” Jounouchi said.
Yuugi showed
him a genuine smile. “Pharaoh,
Prince…I’m just Yuugi, and I would never demand of
my friends to call me anything else.”
“This
world is coming to an end, and you’re talking about
friends?” Honda snorted, but his voice lacked any malice.
“Yes,”
Yuugi said and beamed up at him. He cupped the Puzzle with both hands.
“Thanks to you, I was able to finish this.”
“You’re
welcome,” Jounouchi said lamely. Silence fell - only the
sounds of Ushio rummaging through the garbage and exclaiming
“Money! Money!” every now and then were heard in
the background.
“So…what
are we going to do now? Eat a burger before it’s too
late?”
“Onii-chan,
it must be way past midnight,” Shizuka said, a hint of
amusement to her voice.
Honda checked
his watch. “Half past midnight, it’s okay. I think
there must be a fast food joint or two open at this time of
hour.”
“Don’t
bother, guys,” Yuugi said as he looked out the window,
pointing at the horizon. A faint yellowish light was visible, consuming
everything in its path.
“I
guess that’s our end of the line,” Jounouchi said
and Shizuka pressed herself closer to him.
“Hey,
Yuugi?”
“Yes,
Jounouchi-kun?”
“Thanks,
man.”
“Thank
you too, Jounouchi-kun, Honda-kun, Shizuka-chan…”
A soft smile tugged at Yuugi’s lips. He felt
complete and, despite the situation at hand, at ease. There was another
personality in his mind, he knew it, he could feel it. Mou
hitori no boku. I’m sorry I never got to know you.
There wasn’t any answer, but the presence he felt was
sufficient.
“Onii-chan?”
“It’s
almost here,” Jounouchi said. “I’m sorry,
folks. I really shouldn’t have…”
“It’s
all right,” Yuugi interrupted him. He didn’t want
the last thoughts of any one of them be filled with guilt and grief. It
was, in a way, fitting that their death would be caused by that strange
light, eradicating this world from existence.
Light and Darkness, and light always wins. Life was a game
they had played, and in Yuugi’s mind, they hadn’t
lost. Light always wins. He stared at the oncoming
light with open eyes - it wasn’t blinding, it
was…comforting. Soft yellow, like the sun, the rising sun in
Egypt. As if he could feel a warmer temperature, sand between his toes,
a soft breeze caressing his hair.
Shizuka simply
held on to her brother, unable to see the light coming. Honda held her
hand as Jounouchi held her other hand, and together they held
Yuugi’s hands. An unbreakable circle of
friends…but too late in this universe. Mana and Mahaado
looked at each other, watching the ending of the world from a distance,
their magic enabling them to stay outside of time, unharmed by the
event. Without another word Mahaado turned around, leaving through the
time portal. After one more look, Mana left with him, as the world
behind them ceased to exist.
End
of this timeline
Timeline
III, known universe: Domino City, Japan
The food was
simple, but nourishing - at this moment, he couldn’t have
cared less for the finer taste of the dishes he was used to. There was
even a napkin packed in the box, which he used for wiping off his
fingers before he finished off the rest of the milk. His only regret
was that there was obviously not any more food in the shed; he felt
like he could eat a whole army’s worth.
How long had
it been since he had anything to eat before this? His earliest memory
went back to breakfast at the Palace, and since then he simply drew a
blank. Closing the box and screwing the typical cap on the goblet once
again, he decided that he had to be thankful for the bite of food he
had found instead of complaining. It was dark, cold and raining, and he
had shelter, his clothes only torn at the hem and he’d had
something to eat. Fortunately, his shenti wasn’t soaked, but
slightly damp; he’d been inside before it started to really
pour. His cloak could serve as a blanket, the fabric thick and
comfortable enough to provide him warmth. There wasn’t
anything resembling a bed here, but that was obviously too much to ask
for from this simple shed.
He looked
around to see if he could improvise something to sleep on, but there
was nothing that could serve as a makeshift bed, and he gave up on the
idea. He was too tired and his feet hurt; the chair would have to
suffice. He’d fallen asleep on his throne before, a chair
wasn’t that different. In the morning, he would go out and
find someone who could help him, as well as paying for eating the food;
he didn’t have any money on him, but one of his earrings or
regular rings would do. A Pharaoh would always respect his citizens and
pay for what he took, even if it was simple bread and milk.
There was
someone fumbling at the door, the handle rattling. He turned his head
around, surprised. Who could come here at this time of hour? Another
lost person? How was he supposed to communicate, would they speak the
same language as he? Straightening himself despite his sore feet - he
really, really wanted to sit again - he waited for the visitors to
enter. The door was pushed open, a gust of cold wind blowing inside,
followed by a slew of raindrops.
“What
a shitty weather, fuck,” the tallest of the two spoke out
loud, following by a loud burp.
“You
said it, Soyjo,” the smaller one said, huddling in his
leather coat, his words mumbled by the ratty shawl wrapped around his
head. He had stuffed his hands deep in his pockets, shivering again. No
wonder he was cold - the man wore even rattier jeans, cut open
everywhere, tucked in muddy, badly tied boots.
“It’s a good thing we saw you going in here,” the one called Soyjo said. “A very good thing.
You wanted to
take shelter for the rain too, huh?”
He nodded,
figuring from the intonation of the man’s voice that he asked
a question, and his guess was, ten to one, that he was commenting about
the bad weather.
“Hey,
cat got your tongue?” The small one closed the door behind
him, shutting the rain and the wind out.
“He’s
not very talkative, Haruku,” Soyjo said, grinning.
“Not that he want him to be. He’s not from
here…you aren’t from here, are you?”
“I
do not understand you,” he answered.
“Whoa,
whoa! It talks! Jesus fuck man, is that a language or a disease you
got?”
Soyjo laughed,
sounding like a mule. He took his hands out of his pockets, almost
similarly dressed as Haruku; cut and torn jeans, combined with a
sweaty, sticky shirt and leather jacket, steel-toed boots on his feet.
“Who
fucking cares, man, look at what he’s wearing! I told you
that it was gold! And you fucking telling me that I didn’t
see right! Fuck you, I’m taking that pendant of
his!”
“Hey!”
Haruku yelled at his partner in crime. “Shut the fuck up,
man! Equal share!”
“I do not understand you,” he repeated, keeping his voice neutral. The tones in their voices were picking up, and he didn’t like it one bit - he had to remain calm and collected. He had to have faith in the Gods and in their infinite ways…he wasn’t sure if he was able to summon them in this world, but he could always try, and he had his Sennen Item…these two weren’t friendly, and the feeling that he was in danger increased by the second.
For some
reason, Yuugi had thought of something more spectactular than running
down the streets close to midnight as a rescue mission. Mana and
Mahaado were both magicians, and he had imagined them flying or at
least using some kind of magical transport; instead, they were running
the hardest to wherever Mahaado had located the Pharaoh. Even taking a
car would be faster and more efficient than running, and his lungs
burned in his body, chest heaving from the exertion. Yami
wasn’t doing much better, completely unused to intense
physical activity like this. Anzu was running with, how else, the grace
of a dancer; her steps were long and elegant, as if she
wasn’t hurrying or running at all.
“How…far…is…it?”
Yami panted, stumbling every now and then and latching onto
Yuugi’s jacket to keep him from falling to the ground.
“I…
Idontknow,” Yuugi blurted out in response, keeping his eyes
focused on the two running in front of him. “I
hope…itsnotmuchfurther!”
As if he
overheard them, Mahaado suddenly addressed Mana, not skipping a beat.
“Apprentice,
we better send our
kaa in first, they are faster!”
“Yes,
Master,” Mana agreed and twirled her wand, a soft blue and a
pale pink light glowing from its tip. They both halted in the middle of
the street - fortunately, at this time of hour there were hardly any
cars. Yuugi used the brief respite to catch his breath; wheezing, he
took in large gulps of air, hands on his knees. Yami was next to him,
mimicking his posture, panting as well.
Yuugi almost
forgot to breathe when he saw what the magicians were doing. Mahaado,
enveloped in a dark purplish glow, and Mana, bathing in the blue and
pink colors, were summoning their kaa - Yuugi
couldn’t even ask what it was, but he understood the moment
he saw the bright light. He could see it despite the brightness, two
forms taking shape, all in a matter of seconds; when the light died
out, two familiar monsters were on the field…so to speak. He
smiled in recognition. It was like Kaiba’s holographic
technology had come alive, rendering the images more lifelike than ever
could be possible. Gaping, Anzu noticed the same, and she took a step
closer to Yuugi, bewildered in what she had just seen.
“Black
Magician Girl, Black Magician,” Yami and Yuugi said at the
same time. As the monsters had their back turned to them, they
couldn’t see their faces, though Yuugi caught a brief glimpse
of the Black Magician Girl’s face as she turned to look at
Mana who had summoned there.
Even though
there were no orders given, the two kaa suddenly
moved forward, flying through the air, but not yet out of sight. Yami
was about to say something when Mahaado and Mana started running again,
following their kaa. Yuugi was glad for the brief
pause, ignoring his burning lungs as he sped up, trying to keep up the
other’s pace. Anzu and Yami were close to him, and together
they didn’t lose the two magicians one moment out of their
sight. Despite the intensive running, Yuugi recognized their
surroundings. If he wasn’t mistaken, they were heading for
Domino City Park - this street was notorious for being blocked by
double-parked cars from all the visitors during summer. The fence was
visible in the light of the street lanterns; could the Pharaoh really
be in the municipal park?
Every kid knew
the history of the city park. It was constructed in honor of the
Emperor, in an attempt to imitate the design of the empiric gardens.
While it used to be open only for the nobility in the earlier ages,
nowadays it was a meeting point for almost everyone, from junior to
senior. Every season had its charm, especially in the park: in the
summer there were lots of dance festivals and street theatre, in the
fall guided walks and barbecues. Lots of schoolkids were to be found at
the large lawns, or close to the fountain where they threw in a few yen
to make their wish. Some parts were gardens only, divided by theme: a
Japanese garden of course, a French garden, an English garden.
They finally
came to a halt in front of the large main gate, wide open.
“This
is Domino City Park,” Yuugi said after he found his breath
again, unable to keep the surprise out of his voice. The park was never
closed; the local police made their rounds to chase away hobos or
people who looked suspicious. The dimension of the park was far too
big, though - it could very well be that there were still people
hiding, or that a Pharaoh was lost in one of the gardens. Anzu caught
up at him, looking just as confused as Yami.
Mahaado and
Mana were standing in front of the gate, both sporting a pensive frown.
“What
is it?” Yami asked, wanting to know what was going on.
“I…I
lost it,” Mahaado said.
“Lost
what? Where the Pharaoh is?”
“He
must be in here somewhere,” Mahaado made a wide movement with
his arm, sending his kaa into the park, the Black
Magician determinedly flying, his characteristic staff in his right
hand. Mana seemed to hesitate, but sent her kaa as
well, the young Black Magician Girl reflecting her hesitation and
searching out her Master, following his trail.
“He
must be in here somewhere,” Mahaado repeated, impatience in
his voice.
“Master,
try to concentrate,” Mana gently admonished.
“You’re too tired. If you can’t
concentrate well…”
“Found
him!” Mahaado barked, eyes widened in anxiety. “We
have to hurry!”
Trapped.
No way out.
He stood with his back against the wall, literally. There was no room
to move in this small shed, occupied with tools and maintenance
materials and equipment. He couldn’t reach for one of the
hoes or shovels - if he made a movement, the other two would attack
him. He knew enough to sense trouble, especially when it was so close
to him, and these two oozed danger.
“This
is going to be fucking great, Soyjo, look all that gold!”
“We’re
going to have some great fun with you,” Haruku grinned,
stepping forward. Greed was visible in his eyes; never had he seen so
much gold before. All this jewelry was worth millions, and he
wouldn’t have to have any more worries for the rest of his
life. He was rich!
That pendant
alone would bring up such a hefty sum that he could buy his own
deserted island. With all that money, he could bring some chicks and
party till he dropped…and the gold on this stranger would
provide him with whatever he wanted.
“You’re
a walking treasure chest,” Soyjo said, digging into one of
his pockets and whipping out a switchblade. Clicking it open, he held
it up, blade clearly visible. “We’re going to pry
it off your dead body…we’re going to have so much
fun…!”
He cackled
madly and took another step forward, cornering the other. This was so
easy, like stealing candy from a baby! The other had nothing to defend
himself with, was dressed strangely and obviously didn’t have
any pockets to pull out a knife of his own. So easy, yes, so
easy…and with all that money that gold would fetch, he could
buy himself everything - houses, weapons, bitches…everything.
“Please
do not do this,” he said, keeping his voice calm, though it
took him considerably much effort. He was exhausted, the adrenaline
rushing through his body not enough to fend off the two thieves, both
equipped with knives, the other pulling out his weapon out of his
jacket pocket. They were after his gold of course, and he
didn’t have the slighest illusion they would keep him alive
in their attempt to get it off of him. “I can give
you…”
“We
don’t understand your gibberish, not that it matters
much.” Haruku showed him a devilish grin. “If you
think that someone’s about to save you, forget it.
You’re in a maintenance shack in a city park…tough
luck, stupidhead.”
“Get
his stuff first, then we can have some fun with him,” Soyjo
said. “I saw some rope here…”
“Later,”
Haruku licked his lips and moved forward, his knife firmly in hand,
blade flickering in the yellowish light.
The air was
split by a primal scream, and a thousand knives appeared out of
nowhere, imipaling the thieves the next second. Each and every one of
the blades penetrated their bodies with a sickening sound of tearing
clothes and flesh, boring into bones. Spitting out blood, death
instantaneous, the two of them fell wordlessly to the floor of the
shed, hands dropping their weapons. The Black Magician looked
contemptuously at the lifeless bodies, crossing his arms in front of
his chest. Mahaado hurried forward, barging through the open door,
followed by Mana - both reached their Pharaoh at the same time.
“Pharaoh!
Pharaoh…”
“Mahaado!
Mana…” He opened his arms and the girl jumped into
them, throwing him against the wall with the sheer force of the impact,
hugging him close for a brief moment before she pulled away, looking at
him in ecstasy.
“We
finally, finally found you! For real!”
“Pharaoh…praise
the Gods we found you!”
Mahaado sunk
to the floor, kneeling for him. “We have been searching all
over for you…forgive your servants…”
Yami and Yuugi
stumbled into the shed, both widening their eyes simultaneously in
surprise. In front of them, looking rather disheveled but the
similarity was uncanny, stood another one…another Yuugi. His
skin was dark and his hair was a little wilder, but the shape was
unmistakable.
“Stand
up,” he said, obviously addressing Mahaado, who remained
kneeling, unmoving. The Pharaoh leaned forward and tapped on his
shoulder. “Stand up, my Priest. You have found me. Everything
is all right.”
“I
failed you…”
“No,
you did not,” the Pharaoh said, straightening himself and
looking over at Mana, returning her smile. He looked back at Mahaado
who still lowered his head.
“Stand
up and look at me, Priest Mahaado.”
“Yes,
Great Pharaoh,” he whispered and he got up from the floor,
forcing himself to look at his Pharaoh, only noticing how disheveled he
looked. “What happened! Pharaoh, we’ll take you
home immediately!”
“Yes,
home,” he said and Mana latched onto his arm, exclaiming
“Home!” cheerfully. He trusted his Priest to tell
him how it had been possible for all of them to end up here, but
happiness about their reunion dominated the moment, and he
didn’t want to distrupt that right now.
Yuugi looked
at Yami, smiling like a lunatic; he was so happy for the others to have
found their friend. Yami nodded in appreciation, not insensitive to the
happy emotions. He stared at the other, his third
self as it seems, wondering if he really looked like this
before…no memories were springing to his mind, nothing of
all of this seemed familiar to him - except for the Sennen Puzzle,
dangling from the Pharaoh’s neck.
“Pharaoh,”
Yuugi said, and bowed. Yami scowled a little, remaining upright. He
refused to bow to himself, not even when Yuugi elbowed him.
“Great
Pharaoh, they are your incarnations of this time,” Mahaado
explained to him, switching back to their native language.
“This timeline is perfect - everything has gone as the Great
Timeline has dictated it. The only thing off in this timeline was
caused by your appearance, but now that we have found you, everything
will be restored.”
“I
do not know what you are talking about,” the Pharaoh replied
dryly. “I have been here since…a day, waking up in
some kind of alley, wondering what was going on. I would appreciate it
if we could…leave here?”
“But
of course!” Mahaado said, noticing by now that the lower part
of the Pharaoh’s shenti was spattered with blood. He scowled
at the thieves, mimicking the contemptuous look of his kaa
that was still manifested and held itself up in the air, ready to
attack or to defend according to his master’s wishes.
“We
go home,” Mana chirped, and pulled at the Pharaoh’s
arm. He took a step forward to follow her, all but collapsing the next
moment.
“Pharaoh!”
“It
is all right,” he said, getting back up on his feet again,
limping.
“Pharaoh?
Your feet…”
“It
is all right,” he repeated stubbornly, sending his golden
earrings flying as he shook his head. Mahaado grabbed the small chair
he’d sat on previously, and forced him to sit down again.
Mana knelt at his feet, taking the thin, soiled and torn slippers from
his right foot first.
“Oh!
You’ve walked a great distance, didn’t
you?” she said worriedly.
“No,
not that much,” he answered, heaving a sigh.
“His
footwear isn’t adjusted to these streets,” Mahaado
added, switching back to Japanese again.
“Can
we help?” Yuugi asked, moving forward. Anzu had been
strangely silent, watching the scene in front of her. Mana applied her
knowledge of healing, casting a spell to heal the blisters and the
abrasions on the soles of his feet. He wriggled a little.
“That
feels cold!”
Mana laughed
softly, not minding that casting the spell took almost the rest of her
energy left. Her kaa had already dissolved, unable
as she’d been to keep it up. She didn’t mind as
Mahaado’s kaa was still present; his heka
was much stronger than hers.
“It’s
all right,” she spoke up to answer Yuugi’s
question, also changing back to Japanese. “He
wasn’t really dressed for the occasion, and his feet got hurt
from walking around on the street. We’re…not used
to what you call that ‘asphalt’ of yours.”
Yuugi nodded,
noticing how Mahaado was standing behind the Pharaoh, supporting him,
and how gentle Mana was with her spell, carefully taking care of his
feet, using her heka
to render his slippers spotless clean and whole again. The Pharaoh
himself had gone strangely quiet, head lolled to the side, his hands
resting in his lap as he was waiting for Mana to finish. When Mahaado
picked him up as if he didn’t weigh a thing, Yuugi realized
the other had fallen asleep.
“We
better return to the apartment now,” Mahaado said, keeping
his voice low. Yuugi couldn’t help but stare at the sleeping
Pharaoh in his arms, in every way similar to Yami except for his tan.
“You
look wonderful, mou hitori no boku,” he said, then blushed
furiously.
Mana was the
first to break the slightly awkward silence, and her cheerful laugh
cleared the sudden tension. Yuugi, Yami and Anzu were all red in the
face; Anzu didn’t know whether to cry or to laugh. She was
extremely grateful when Mana came to walk next to her, keeping her head
adverted at first. The magician patted her hand, and Anzu understood
her as the other showed her a compassionate look.
“Master
cares for our Pharaoh a lot, as we all do,” she said
brightly, stressing the words ‘a lot’. She looked
years younger however; the joy of finding their Pharaoh had taken away
a lot of her worries. Anzu nodded, not really happy with the situation
but she understood enough of it to know that she would have to be
content with ‘only’ being friends. As they walked
silently, Mana and Mahaado exchanging some words in their native
language every now and then, Anzu accepted just as silently that being
friends with both Yuugis was important enough to her to fight for their
friendship, and not allow it to be ruined with unreasonable
expectations or ruined chances. A smile found its way to her lips and
she kept in pace with Mana, the girl’s cheerfulness
contageous.
The lights
were still on their apartment; no one had even thought of switching off
the lights in their haste. Even the heating was still on; Anzu heaved a
relieved sigh. It had stopped raining, but it was still chilly outside
and she felt chilled to the bone. Yami shivered as well, since
he’d run outside with nothing but his school jacket on. Yuugi
took off his shoes, looking around for the house slippers. Mahaado had
walked a few steps forward and turned around in the middle of the
hallway, still carrying the Pharaoh.
He heaved a
soft sigh before he spoke.
“My
Pharaoh needs food, a bath and some rest,” he said. Mana
nodded at his announcement, disappearing into the kitchen. Anzu trailed
behind her, offering the girl her help with the preparations. Yuugi
certainly hadn’t missed the ‘my’ Mahaado
has used in reference to the Pharaoh; he had said it earlier, in the
shed when they rescued him from the thieves.
“We
should not dally that much longer,” the magician continued.
“How
much time is there left?” Yami asked, moving towards Yuugi.
“The
other timelines have been…restored as it was fitting for
them,” Mahaado said.
“My…our
Pharaoh here is the Pharaoh who was supposed…” He
stared at Yami and Yuugi, shaking his head. “I can not
divulge much more, I already told too much. As soon as we leave, I will
cast one more spell, to make you forget what has happened. Your
knowledge of all this could alter this timeline, and it was perfect how
we found it….”
He remained
silent. Finally he said: “We have some time left. The rest of
this evening.”
Yuugi all but
clinged to Yami.
“This
evening only?”
“We have both depleted our heka, when we called forth our kaa,” Mahaado said. “We have a little left for our…jump back, but a lot of necessary energy will come from our Pharaoh here.”
“I
didn’t know we had only this evening,” Yuugi said,
looking distressed. The magician lowered his head.
“I
know what you are going through, Prince. It is however, important that
we do not disturb the timeline anymore than we are already doing by
simply staying here. The sooner we leave, the better…but I
doubt that is the answer you were wanting to hear.”
“Not
really, no,” Yuugi mumbled.
Yami searched
out his hand. “Then let this evening be for everyone of
us,” he spoke. “The way we want to spend it, with
the ones we love and care for.”
Mahaado’s
eyes showed melancholy and he turned away a little, carefully with the
Pharaoh in his arms, still asleep. He recognized the feelings between
the other two all too well; a love that would never be really true and
would never come to pass. They weren’t destined to be
together, however harsh it was; it was the undeniable truth in their
future. Yami was the Pharaoh, who was going to be sent back to the
Afterlife sooner or later. So many trials and tests were still awaiting
them, so much grief and sorrow as well as happiness and victory.
Mahaado studied the face of his sleeping ruler. He had failed him
enough, he wouldn’t fail him now, this evening, this one
night they had together. He wasn’t afraid of what the morning
would bring, even more so he was looking forward to it. Together
forever. Past, present and future. An eternal servant.
Time was a
strange thing, Yuugi thought as he sat on the edge of the bed, fully
dressed. Morning already,
and he had hoped this night would never end. Not only for himself.
He’d seen the love in Mana’s eyes, he’d
seen the deep respect and love in Mahaado’s eyes.
He’d seen the love in Yami’s eyes, and knew there
had been love in his eyes, too.
How could a night be so short, and so intense? How could he live with himself, knowing what he knew now? About timelines, other realities, other Jounouchis, Anzus and Yuugis who existed in other worlds, making mistakes, living, loving, laughing and lamenting all the same?
How could he
live now everything would be turned back, and his Other would become a
spirit again, losing his body for the second time? Yuugi had hoped to
learn the reasons behind it all, the answers to his million questions,
but he knew it was too late - he couldn’t ask them anymore,
and if he could, they wouldn’t be answered. This
morning…this morning, people would die, and they would
embrace it with joy.
Startled as he
felt hands on his shoulders, he quickly broke into a smile when he saw
it was Yami. Who else could be touching him at this very moment?
“Aibou,”
he said, cupping his face, “this is going to be difficult.
When they leave…”
“Shhh,”
Yuugi silenced him. “One more kiss, please. They’re
not going to leave, not yet.”
There
wasn’t an answer, just soft lips on his, and he
couldn’t help but heave a sigh.
“This
shouldn’t happen,” he said when Yami pulled away
from him, repeating the kiss on his neck.
“It
seems that higher forces than us have decided for it to be this way,
aibou,” Yami said. “Fate, or destiny. Whatever
brought us together, whatever made you solve the Puzzle after eight
year, whatever invented that Great Timeline…it also made
them, no forced them, to return to where they came from.”
“But
they came from nowhere, mou hitori no boku,” Yuugi said.
“As soon as they…leave, they’ll
die!”
Yami nodded.
He couldn’t, and wouldn’t, sugarcoat it.
“They will die, but not in a way we see death, aibou. They
will continue to live on another plane - Afterlife, heaven, however you
want to name it…but it is something they believe in, and
something that will await them, and they will be happy
together.”
“As
long as they’re happy,” Yuugi said, but his voice
didn’t sound very confident. He looked up when there was a
knock at his door.
“So
early?” Yami said confusedly and looked at the clock. It was
unbelievable that it was a regular school day, and Yuugi
should’ve been sitting in his math class by now. He
couldn’t care less at the moment. Time…had proven
itself to be very strange and very fleeting, slipping through his
fingers like sand, whisked away by the wind…
“Too
early, way too early,” he mumbled and stood up from his side
of the bed. Yami followed him, standing up as well, the chain of the
Puzzle rattling as he moved.
“Aibou.”
“I
know.”
Yami pressed a
kiss on his forehead, but made no movement to walk to the door. They
remained standing, facing each other, bright violet eyes gazing into
dark crimson ones.
“We
have to go.”
“We
can’t keep them waiting.”
“This
is horrible,” Yuugi whispered as he pressed down the handle
of the door, opening it.
“I
know,” Yami said, repeating Yuugi’s earlier words.
He felt nervous, light-hearted and burdened at the same time if that
was possible; he couldn’t describe the feeling that ran
through him. Was it because he was going to meet the other Pharaoh
again? Or was it the inevitability of the situation…and that
he would return to be the spirit of the Sennen Puzzle as soon as the
magician left?
“Good
morning!” Mana waved at them as they entered the living room.
They were standing close to the window where Mahaado had stood only
yesterday - only a few hours ago. Yuugi swallowed, returning the wave.
She looked different, and not only because of her clothes. The
formless, dark purple long robes were gone; instead she wore a short
skirt, combined with a top in the same color, a golden belt around her
waist. Her eyes were sparkling, and her smile was brighter than before.
The Pharaoh was standing next to her, the epitome of composed calmness,
his hands next to his sides. His clothing was repaired and his jewelry
shone in the early morning light. Mahaado wasn’t present yet
- secretly, Yuugi hoped that their departure would be postponed, for
whatever reason Mahaado hadn’t shown up.
Anzu was in
the other corner, also waving at Yuugi and smiling when he returned the
wave as well. She’d been reading something, and she looked
rested, yet anxious - her face was a little too pale, her expression
too blank as to keep her emotions in check.
“I
hope you slept well?” the magician asked and she even winked.
Yuugi blushed furiously, and the Pharaoh seemed to be very amused.
“This
has to be one of the most…eventful nights of my
life,” he said, and Yuugi looked crestfallen when hearing the
word ‘life’. If only they
didn’t have to leave…he had hoped they
could at least share breakfast together, but the table wasn’t
set, even though the dishes from last night were cleared out. They had
shared a very late dinner, Mana serving them quick and easy Egyptian
dishes, but tasty enough to feed them sufficiently. Yuugi had never
thought he’d sleep well with a full stomach, but he
hadn’t gottten much sleep anyway, so…
Yami chuckled
when seeing Yuugi blush even deeper. For a moment, just this little
moment, everything seemed to be perfect - just joking around, sharing a
little fun, being together. Yuugi wouldn’t have minded if
this moment did not end; he’d rather stick with his friends
than send them off to wherever they were going…and in their
case, going to somewhere no one could follow them. He didn’t
even dare ask for Mahaado, as if that would burst this happy little
bubble.
Mana talked
softly to the Pharaoh in their native language, while Anzu got up from
her chair and walking over to Yuugi and Yami, only her strained
movements betraying the tension she was trying to hide.
Yuugi beamed
up at her in an attempt to reassure her. He was glad that
she’d been with him the whole time; she was his best friend,
and that was something he was extremely grateful for. The moment he
opened his mouth to ask her how her night had been, if she’d
gotten any sleep, the door to the living room opened and Mahaado
entered.
“Good
morning everyone, good morning, Pharaoh,” he greeted, his
voice less tensed than Yuugi was used to. How could these people not be
afraid of what was waiting for them? Did the Pharaoh know everything
about what had happened? The way he was standing, he was one and all
regal calmness, unfazed. He nodded at Mahaado, acknowledging his
presence, prepared for anything. Mahaado already seemed to reach for
him…
“We
don’t want you to go,” Yuugi said, voice loud.
“There must be a way we can solve this, a way that will make
everyone of us happy, that everything can be solved.”
Mahaado
withdrew his hand, turning around to face Yuugi.
“I
am afraid, young Prince, that is not possible, no matter how much we
all want to,” he said. His robes were a light beige,
generously flowing around his body, but not as formless as his previous
clothing. The fabric was held up by a beautiful golden belt, and his
hair was covered by a headpiece, also made of gold. Yuugi was fairly
sure these were his clothes as he was supposed to wear all the time, in
his function as a Priest.
“All
the timelines have to follow the Great Timeline, and all of you, and
especially the Pharaoh, are a part of such an influential event that
any disturbance could cause a major collapse in the Great Timeline
itself.”
“We
know,” Anzu said, looking sad. “But that
doesn’t mean that we’re overjoyed to see you all
go, especially because we know what awaits you.”
Mahaado
nodded, the fabric of his headpiece shifting over his shoulders with
every movement. The Pharaoh shifted on his feet, tugging a little at
his purple cloak.
“There
is a battle ahead of me that I need to fight, and I am not going to
lose,” he said. “The darkness will be sealed for
millennia, and that is a victory worthy of my life.” He
turned to Yuugi and bowed to him. “My strong
vessel.”
He went to
Yami and bowed to him as well. “My strong self. We will all
survive.”
Yami finally
returned the favor, bowing to him. “It was an honor to meet
you.”
That answered
Yuugi’s unspoken question if the Pharaoh knew about
everything, and though he was a little confused about his words about a
battle ahead of him, it filled his heart with sadness that no more time
was given to them. He would’ve loved to talk to the Pharaoh
and learn from him and his culture, and to save him from impending
death…or just that nothingness.
Mahaado raised
his hand, but not in a way to say goodbye. A light purple glow
surrounded him for a brief moment, and then it was gone. It was the
spell he told them he would cast; the spell that would make them forget
what happened, or at least the information and knowledge they had
gotten from the previous events. So little time, so much
happening.
“My
Pharaoh, it is time.”
The voice of
magician sounded with longing, without a trace of fear or hesitation.
The Pharaoh showed Yami and Yuugi a warm smile.
“The
Gods watch over you always.”
Yami nodded
simply in return, while Yuugi swallowed heavily. He couldn’t
hold back the tears and desperately didn’t want to cry in
front of his friends, in front of the Pharaoh, Mahaado and Mana who
were literally going to walk to their death.
“We’ll
see you again, Prince, sooner than you think!” The girl
waved, smiling as she never smiled before.
“Farewell,
Prince, Other Pharaoh,” Mahaado said, a hint of amusement at
last. He took the Pharaoh’s left hand, and Mana all but
latching onto his other, immediately opening a portal with the supplied
energy.
The Pharaoh
looked over his shoulder as they stood in front of the portal, seconds
away of walking through it. There was no fear on his face, only a very
familiar smirk, and suddenly he moved both entwined hands up, as in a
last greeting.
Yuugi put up
his hand as well, waving his last goodbye, unable to keep from crying.
He didn’t want the Pharaoh’s last memory of him to
be with tears on his face, even though he knew the other would forget
it as soon as they went through the portal. Mana, Mahaado, the
Pharaoh…they would all be gone, gone forever, dissolved into
the timeline and into nothingness. They would simply cease to exist as
all the timelines has been restored, their presence superfluous. The
light absorbed them as they stepped through, the flowing cloak of the
Pharaoh the last thing to be seen. The portal shone strongly after they
passed, their bodies disappearing from sight.
The bracelets
around Anzu’s wrists clicked against each other as she was
still waving, the portal slowly shrinking, the light still shining
brightly until it disappeared suddenly, as if someone had turned off a
switch. Silence was all that reigned in the apartment that seemed heavy
with suppressed grief and pain, the last trace of lingering hope gone
with the portal.
“Aibou.”
Yami said, his voice sounding strangely hollow.
“Mou
hitori no boku…”
“Aibou,
do you want to sit down…?”
“I’m
sorry, I’m so sorry,” Yuugi whispered.
“What
do you mean, aibou? There is nothing you have to be sorry
about.”
“Yes,
I do,” Yuugi hiccupped. “Look at me, crying all
over. I didn’t want them to see me cry as they
left…”
He gently
touched Yuugi’s shoulder, relieved that he was still solid.
Yuugi needed some comfort, and hopefully he could give it to him before
he would dissolve as well…he had no doubt that as soon as
the portal was gone, Mahaado’s magic would end, unable to
uphold his physical body.
“Aibou,
you remember what they said, do you not? There is still a long road
ahead of us, a road wherein we will discover my memories. There are
dangers ahead, but also good moments, and we will learn from
it…we will both learn from it.”
“You…your
other self didn’t even hesitate in stepping through that
portal.” Yuugi rubbed at his eyes, hating that he
couldn’t stop the flow of tears. Anzu dabbed at her eyes as
well, using a handkerchief to absorb the flow of tears.
“It
was courage,” Yami said. “Courage we all share,
aibou. You have been very courageous too, you know…when you
stood up for your friends, when you gave people a second
chance…it is a trait we all share.”
“If
it’s courage, why am I crying so much?”
“Do
you want to say that only girls are allowed to cry?” Anzu
said, trying to make it sound like a joke. Yami showed a small grin.
“Of
course not. Tears are never a sign of weakness, you both know that. You
are my friends, more than that - you are here.” He placed a
hand over his heart. Anzu nodded, suppressing another sob.
“Those
battles and tests ahead of you took place millennia ago,”
Yuugi whispered. “That was what the Pharaoh meant. Mou hitori
no boku…”
“Yes,
aibou?” Yami said, leaning into him to put his hand on
Yuugi’s shoulder. Both he and Anzu gasped in surprise when
his hand went straight through Yuugi’s body, unable to touch
him.
“No,
no, not now!” Yuugi cried.
“With
Mahaado gone, the spell can’t be upheld any
longer,” Yami sighed, the look on his face devastated. Anzu
stared at him, her mouth moving as she couldn’t find the
words. He was dissolving in front of her eyes, his solid body becoming
more and more ghost-like by the second.
“Please
don’t leave me!”
“I
am not leaving you, aibou…we could not be
closer…”
“You’re
right…” Yuugi looked up, rubbing at his eyes
again. He was done crying - tears wouldn’t bring his friends
back, and tears wouldn’t change the situation. He forced
himself to watch as his Other, Yami, disappeared, wearing the same
smirk as the Pharaoh when he stepped through the portal. The Puzzle
fell to the floor, his body too far gone to support the weight. Yuugi
reached for the Item, grabbing the thick chain and putting it around
his neck again, the weight immediately familiar against his chest. A
hand was on his shoulder - Anzu’s. Gratefully, he looked up
at her.
“Is
he home again?” she asked, a little sheepishly because she
referred to the Puzzle as his home. Yuugi beamed at her.
“Yes,
he is,” he said. Just as the weight of the Puzzle,
Yami’s presence in his mind was familiar. It would be hard
living without it, as that day would be inevitable as well, but as far
as Yuugi was concerned, that day would take a long time to come. Time
again. Anzu smiled nonetheless. She suddenly turned her head
to the right.
“What
is it?” Yuugi asked, cautious.
“I
thought I heard something,” she said.
“Someone?”
“No…look,
Yuugi!”
She
didn’t have to point at anything in particular, as it seemed
all of the furniture and objects in the living room started to decay
and rot. Dust settled over the couch, chairs and the large dining
table, the walls looked gray and dirty, with the wall paper torn and
peeled off. The book case was empty, only a few volumes, dusty and
crumbling, left behind. The paint was chipped, large flakes falling
down from the ceiling.
“I
guess that was the last of their
heka,” Anzu said. She looked up at the ceiling
which showed large black circles, as if someone had been smoking there
at exact the same place for ages.
“I
guess so too,” Yuugi agreed, feeling sad. All those beautiful
things, gone, withered away, just as time would take everything away. We
will forget in time, he reminded himself,
but we won’t be forgotten in time.
“We
better go,” Anzu suggested. “Ah…my book
bag!”
He had to
suppress a short laugh. “Is mine there, too?”
“Yes,
they’re both here,” Anzu said, pulling out the two
heavy bags from behind the dusty, moldy chair she had just been sitting
in only moments ago. Yuugi took his bag from her, flinging it over his
shoulder.
“Come
on, everyone will be so worried,” he said.
“Especially
Jounouchi! He’s going to give you an earfull when he hears
all about this…”
“I’m
sure he will!”
They left the
living room, not surprised to find the hallway in the same state of
decay. Carefully, they moved past the large gaps in the carpet,
avoiding touching the dirty walls. Yuugi reached the front door first,
and rattled at the doorknob. It broke off as the door swung open.
“What
the hell?”
He immediately
took a step back, almost bumping into Anzu, as the tall man towered
over him. “Hey kids, get out of the way! These apartments are
going to be demolished, what the hell are you doing here?”
“Nothing,”
Anzu chirped, “we were…just curious!”
“Curious,
my ass,” the man answered rudely. He tugged at his utility
belt and took out a hammer. “Get lost!”
Anzu had to
giggle, dragging Yuugi with her as they searched for the elevator of
the building, which looked dilapidated in broad daylight. A large crane
was next to it, and construction workers were all over the place. Yuugi
looked over his shoulder a few time, being stared after by the man that
had ‘caught’ them, but he wasn’t really
looking at the man - he was looking for a last glimpse of Mana,
Mahaado, or the Pharaoh…but there was nothing to see, there
was nothing that remained of them, and finally he turned his head
around and looked forward, if only to see where he was going; a lot of
rubbish was on the floor.
They avoided a
few other construction workers on their way down and left the building,
Anzu looking around to discern where they were. Not that extremely far
from the park, as their run from yesterday evening had proved. She
pointed westwards.
“That
way to school, Yuugi,” she said.
“Okay!”
She shifted
her book bag from one hand to another, walking along Yuugi on their way
back to school. Obviously lost in thoughts, she stared in front of her,
her hands loosely on her back. Yuugi’s thoughts drifted off
as well, subconsciously worrying about his Other and searching him out
in his soul room, wanting to know if he really, really was there.
“Mou
hitori no boku?”
“Yes,
aibou?” came the immediate answer.
“Will
we ever know if they succeeded in repairing the timeline?”
“The
Great Timeline they were talking about was out of danger with the
timelines they repaired…and with the Pharaoh they found in
this universe, everything was rectified,” his Other pondered.
“I guess that if they really did not succeed after all, this
world would either come to an end right now or they would return, to
try to restore it.”
“I
would love to see them again,” Yuugi whispered.
“Mou hitori no boku…”
“Yes,
aibou.”
“About
last night…”
“About
last night,” he repeated, some amusement to his voice.
“What is it you wanted to talk about, last night?”
“Hey,
are you blacking out on me again?”
“Whu-what?”
Yuugi blinked a few times.
“Keep
your attention to traffic young man,” Anzu mock-scolded him.
She lifted up her finger, tapping him on the nose. “I
don’t want to see you getting almost hit by a car once
again.”
“You’re
right about that,” Yuugi said a little sheepishly.
Anzu reached
for him, grabbing his hand and dragging him over the crossing.
“Come on, it’s green now!”
She laughed
contagiously, and he laughed with her. Their memories started to fade
during the last spell Mahaado had cast. As they ran to the other side
of the street, time twisted and turned one more time, a small ripple in
the universe of timelines, to return to a calm, smooth pattern as the
Great Timeline moved on, all in due time.
“Yuugi!
Anzu’s here for you!”
“Coming!”
Mutou Yuugi
snatched up his Sennen Puzzle, a golden pendant shaped like an
upside-down pyramid, and put the metal chain over his head. Satisfied,
he looked into the mirror, checking the way the Puzzle was secured - he
used to wear it on a rope, but recent events had proven that a chain
would be far more effective.
“I
can’t believe it,” Yuugi muttered.
“What,
aibou?” A voice floated through the room, only audible to the
young teen.
“That
so many people are after the Puzzle, mou hitori no boku,”
Yuugi answered, as if it was the most normal thing in the world to
speak to a spitting image of oneself in spirit form.
“I
am really glad that you have chosen for a more…ah, sturdier
solution,” the spirit said, his crimson eyes resting upon his
home - the Sennen Puzzle. Ever since Yuugi had managed to solve this
mysterious puzzle, his spirit and soul had been reawakened. For what
purpose or reason still eluded the both of them, but he had faith
enough that someday it would become all clear to them. For now, they
had their hands full on finding his memories; as he didn’t
recall anything from his past, and that was the most logical thing to
look for first.
“Mou
hitori no boku...”
“Yes,
aibou?”
“You’re
daydreaming. We have to go to school!”
“Ah,
yes, you are right,” he chuckled briefly and the next second
he was gone, retreating back into the Puzzle. Yuugi smiled to himself. One
day, we’ll find your memories, mou hitori no boku, and then
you’ll know all about yourself and why you’re here.
Until then, we’ll be friends and help each other.
Slinging the book bag over his shoulder and storming out of his room,
Yuugi almost ran over his mother.
“Sorry
about that, kaa-san!”
“Were
you talking to yourself again?” the woman asked, throwing him
a suspicious look.
“S-sorry.”
Yuugi blushed.
“You’re
growing up to be exactly like your grandfather,” she said,
shaking her head though she didn’t sound too sad about it.
“Now, hurry up, don’t keep poor Anzu
waiting!”
“No,
kaa-san,” Yuugi answered and threw her a smile before turning
around and thundering down the stairs. He really should’ve
gotten up earlier - there was no time for breakfast now. Yuugi opened
the door, squinting his eyes at the bright sun.
“Yuugi,
over here,” Anzu waved, her voice clearly indicating that she
wanted to be saved from his grandfather. Mutou Sugoroku was the
proprietor of the Kame Game shop for decades on end, and besides his
love for games he was pretty much renowned for his appreciation of the
female bust size. Anzu was too polite to tell him to knock it off with
glaring at her upper body and she heaved an audible sigh when Yuugi
grabbed her hand and dragged her off to school.
“Bye,
jii-chan! See you later!”
“Really,
Yuugi, your grandfather…” Anzu started when they
were well out of sight. Yuugi was now the one to heave a sigh.
“I
know, Anzu…he doesn’t mean it like that,
really.”
“He’s
a pervert,” she whispered furiously.
Yuugi blushed again, trying to find a way not to belittle his
grandfather’s actions…but he couldn’t
find any, because Anzu was right.
“He
really doesn’t mean it that bad,” he repeated,
willing his blush away. Anzu was far too optimistic and cheerful to let
it ruin her day, and started talking about an upcoming school
performance. She loved to dance, and this year the students of their
class had chosen to incorporate dance in their annual performance.
Yuugi wasn’t really looking forward to it and hoped he could
avoid all the dancing by simply volunteering to help with the costumes
and the stage settings. Mentally going over their classes for today, he
listened to Anzu talking as she was describing her costume and the
dance she was studying.
“I
think red would fit you splendidly,” Yuugi said, blushing at
the thought of Anzu in a form-fitting, long red dress. They halted in
front of the traffic lights. Anzu was very excited about the
performance, as her greatest dream was to go study modern dance in New
York. Only her best and closest friends knew of her ambition - Anzu
wasn’t the kind of girl to flaunt it in everybody’s
face, but she sure loved this opportunity, no matter if it was only a
mere school performance, to demonstrate her skills.
The traffic
light went green and Yuugi already took a step forward, still listening
attentively to Anzu describing the costumes for the dance. His feet had
barely touched the asphalt when he heard the girl screaming his name.
“Yuugi!”
Her hand
grabbed him at the collar of his school uniform and yanked him
forcefully back, out of the way of the onstorming car. Yuugi yelped in
surprise, stumbling and falling on his ass as she let go of him.
“People
are driving like crazy around here,” she muttered, looking at
the car disappearing around the corner, honking for good measure. She
reached for him to get him back up on his feet.
“Phew!
If it weren’t for you, I would be roadkill by now!”
Yuugi dusted off his school uniform, glaring at the direction in which
the car had disappeared to.
“If
you didn’t have me to look after you,” Anzu
quipped. She smiled. Yuugi adjusted his backpack and returned her smile.
“Come
on, let’s go.”
Anzu had
picked up the conversation about the school’s performance
again and Yuugi listened to her, enjoying her calm voice and her
enthusiasm for the dance. His own thoughts wandered away just a little,
and suddenly, something… or rather someone, to the left
caught his eye. It was a man, sitting behind a wooden table, a crystal
ball in front of him. He was dressed in a large, formless robe, masking
a great part of his face.
“Hey
kid, want to know the future?”
“The
future?”
Yuugi
wasn’t really sure. He wanted to know the future, that was
for sure - he wanted to help his Other, the spirit of the Sennen
Puzzle. It had just been a few weeks since they won Duelist Kingdom and
it had become pretty apparent that people were after him and the
Puzzle. Maybe…a glimpse in the future could help him out?
“Are
you sure?” Anzu asked, scrunching up her face. Whoever was
sitting in front of a dark alley with such weird clothes and a crystal
ball in front of them was pretty weird in her book, but if
Yuugi
really wanted to, it couldn’t hurt, could it?
“Can
you really see the future?” Yuugi asked, slightly incredulous.
“But
of course,” the man answered smoothly. “But I need
something personal of yours…your pendant perhaps?”
“Yuugi…are
you sure…?” Anzu asked again. She knew that there
was something about the Puzzle, and not only because of
Yuugi’s other. He hesitated, not sure whether he could trust
the man or not. It took him a few minutes, but then he beamed at Anzu,
his good-hearted and kind nature prevailing. He would have to have
faith, not only for now, but also in the future. He would find his
Other’s name, his memories, and help him as much as he helped
Yuugi in retrieving his grandfather’s soul. He would trust,
he would have faith, in what was to come, and what Fate - and time -
had all laid out for him.
He took the chain from his neck, missing the satisfied grin on the man’s face. A glimpse in the future wouldn’t hurt. He would do anything to help his Other, and his faith and hope was more important, even if he was about to be fooled. He would remain positive, and believe in himself and the goodness of mankind. Yuugi handed the Puzzle over to the man, unknown of the series of events he would set off with this simple gesture, events that would test him, his friends and his Other, in deepest darkness and hopeful light.
«
Back to 2006 Novella Challenge Entries
« Back to
DarkMagick.net